doc/texinfo.tex
changeset 449 c30569f54936
equal deleted inserted replaced
-1:000000000000 0:92893b299c3b
       
     1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
       
     2 %
       
     3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
       
     4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
       
     5 %
       
     6 \def\texinfoversion{2003-07-28.08}
       
     7 %
       
     8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
       
     9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
       
    10 %
       
    11 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
       
    12 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
       
    13 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
       
    14 % your option) any later version.
       
    15 %
       
    16 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
       
    17 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
       
    18 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
       
    19 % General Public License for more details.
       
    20 %
       
    21 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
       
    22 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
       
    23 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
       
    24 % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
       
    25 %
       
    26 % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
       
    27 % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
       
    28 % what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
       
    29 %
       
    30 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
       
    31 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
       
    32 %   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/texinfo.tex
       
    33 %     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
       
    34 %   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
       
    35 %     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
       
    36 %   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
       
    37 %
       
    38 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
       
    39 %
       
    40 % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
       
    41 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
       
    42 %
       
    43 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
       
    44 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
       
    45 % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
       
    46 %
       
    47 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
       
    48 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
       
    49 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
       
    50 %   tex foo.texi
       
    51 %   texindex foo.??
       
    52 %   tex foo.texi
       
    53 %   tex foo.texi
       
    54 %   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
       
    55 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
       
    56 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
       
    57 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
       
    58 %
       
    59 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
       
    60 % extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
       
    61 % full Texinfo distribution.
       
    62 
       
    63 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
       
    64 
       
    65 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
       
    66 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
       
    67 % they might have appeared in the input file name.
       
    68 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
       
    69   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
       
    70 
       
    71 \message{Basics,}
       
    72 \chardef\other=12
       
    73 
       
    74 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
       
    75 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
       
    76 \let\+ = \relax
       
    77 
       
    78 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
       
    79 \let\ptexb=\b
       
    80 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
       
    81 \let\ptexc=\c
       
    82 \let\ptexcomma=\,
       
    83 \let\ptexdot=\.
       
    84 \let\ptexdots=\dots
       
    85 \let\ptexend=\end
       
    86 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
       
    87 \let\ptexexclam=\!
       
    88 \let\ptexgtr=>
       
    89 \let\ptexhat=^
       
    90 \let\ptexi=\i
       
    91 \let\ptexindent=\indent
       
    92 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
       
    93 \let\ptexless=<
       
    94 \let\ptexplus=+
       
    95 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
       
    96 \let\ptexslash=\/
       
    97 \let\ptexstar=\*
       
    98 \let\ptext=\t
       
    99 
       
   100 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
       
   101 % starts a new line in the output.
       
   102 \newlinechar = `^^J
       
   103 
       
   104 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
       
   105 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
       
   106 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
       
   107 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
       
   108 \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
       
   109 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
       
   110 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
       
   111 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
       
   112 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
       
   113 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
       
   114 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
       
   115 \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
       
   116 \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
       
   117 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
       
   118 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
       
   119 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
       
   120 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
       
   121 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
       
   122 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
       
   123 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
       
   124 %
       
   125 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
       
   126 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
       
   127 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
       
   128 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
       
   129 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
       
   130 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
       
   131 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
       
   132 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
       
   133 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
       
   134 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
       
   135 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
       
   136 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
       
   137 %
       
   138 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
       
   139 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
       
   140 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
       
   141 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
       
   142 \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
       
   143 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
       
   144 \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
       
   145 
       
   146 % In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
       
   147 % in some cases the escape char.
       
   148 \chardef\colonChar = `\:
       
   149 \chardef\commaChar = `\,
       
   150 \chardef\dotChar   = `\.
       
   151 \chardef\equalChar = `\=
       
   152 \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
       
   153 \chardef\questChar = `\?
       
   154 \chardef\semiChar  = `\;
       
   155 \chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
       
   156 \chardef\underChar = `\_
       
   157 
       
   158 % Ignore a token.
       
   159 %
       
   160 \def\gobble#1{}
       
   161 
       
   162 % True if #1 is the empty string, i.e., called like `\ifempty{}'.
       
   163 %
       
   164 \def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}%
       
   165 \def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}%
       
   166 
       
   167 % Hyphenation fixes.
       
   168 \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
       
   169 \hyphenation{eshell}
       
   170 \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
       
   171 \hyphenation{time-stamp}
       
   172 \hyphenation{white-space}
       
   173 
       
   174 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
       
   175 \newdimen\bindingoffset
       
   176 \newdimen\normaloffset
       
   177 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
       
   178 
       
   179 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
       
   180 % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
       
   181 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
       
   182 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
       
   183 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
       
   184 %
       
   185 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
       
   186 \def\loggingall{%
       
   187   \tracingstats2
       
   188   \tracingpages1
       
   189   \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
       
   190   \tracingparagraphs1
       
   191   \tracingoutput1
       
   192   \tracingmacros2
       
   193   \tracingrestores1
       
   194   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
       
   195   \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
       
   196     \tracingscantokens1
       
   197     \tracingifs1
       
   198     \tracinggroups1
       
   199     \tracingnesting2
       
   200     \tracingassigns1
       
   201   \fi
       
   202   \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
       
   203   \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
       
   204 }%
       
   205 
       
   206 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
       
   207 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
       
   208 %
       
   209 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
       
   210   \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
       
   211 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
       
   212   \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
       
   213 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
       
   214   \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
       
   215 
       
   216 % For @cropmarks command.
       
   217 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
       
   218 %
       
   219 \newif\ifcropmarks
       
   220 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
       
   221 %
       
   222 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
       
   223 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
       
   224 %
       
   225 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
       
   226 \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
       
   227 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
       
   228 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
       
   229 
       
   230 % Main output routine.
       
   231 \chardef\PAGE = 255
       
   232 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
       
   233 
       
   234 \newbox\headlinebox
       
   235 \newbox\footlinebox
       
   236 
       
   237 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
       
   238 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
       
   239 \def\onepageout#1{%
       
   240   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
       
   241   %
       
   242   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
       
   243   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
       
   244   %
       
   245   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
       
   246   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
       
   247   \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
       
   248   \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
       
   249   %
       
   250   {%
       
   251     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
       
   252     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
       
   253     % before the \shipout runs.
       
   254     %
       
   255     \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
       
   256     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
       
   257     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
       
   258                    % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
       
   259     \shipout\vbox{%
       
   260       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
       
   261       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
       
   262       %
       
   263       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
       
   264         \hsize = \outerhsize
       
   265         \vskip-\topandbottommargin
       
   266         \vtop to0pt{%
       
   267           \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
       
   268           \nointerlineskip
       
   269           \line{%
       
   270             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
       
   271             \hfill
       
   272             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
       
   273           }%
       
   274           \vss}%
       
   275         \vskip\topandbottommargin
       
   276         \line\bgroup
       
   277           \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
       
   278           \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
       
   279           \vbox\bgroup
       
   280       \fi
       
   281       %
       
   282       \unvbox\headlinebox
       
   283       \pagebody{#1}%
       
   284       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
       
   285         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
       
   286         % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
       
   287         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
       
   288         \vskip 2\baselineskip
       
   289         \unvbox\footlinebox
       
   290       \fi
       
   291       %
       
   292       \ifcropmarks
       
   293           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
       
   294         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
       
   295         \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
       
   296         \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
       
   297         \vbox to0pt{\vss
       
   298           \line{%
       
   299             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
       
   300             \hfill
       
   301             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
       
   302           }%
       
   303           \nointerlineskip
       
   304           \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
       
   305         }%
       
   306       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
       
   307       \fi
       
   308     }% end of \shipout\vbox
       
   309   }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
       
   310   \advancepageno
       
   311   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
       
   312 }
       
   313 
       
   314 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
       
   315 
       
   316 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
       
   317 {\catcode`\@ =11
       
   318 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
       
   319 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
       
   320 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
       
   321   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
       
   322 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
       
   323 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
       
   324 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
       
   325 }
       
   326 
       
   327 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
       
   328 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
       
   329 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
       
   330 %
       
   331 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
       
   332 \def\nstop{\vbox
       
   333   {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
       
   334 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
       
   335 \def\nsbot{\vbox
       
   336   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
       
   337 
       
   338 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
       
   339 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
       
   340 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
       
   341 %
       
   342 \def\parsearg#1{%
       
   343   \let\next = #1%
       
   344   \begingroup
       
   345     \obeylines
       
   346     \futurelet\temp\parseargx
       
   347 }
       
   348 
       
   349 % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
       
   350 % the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
       
   351 \def\parseargx{%
       
   352   % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
       
   353   \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
       
   354     \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
       
   355   \else
       
   356     \expandafter\parseargline
       
   357   \fi
       
   358 }
       
   359 
       
   360 % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
       
   361 {\obeyspaces %
       
   362  \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
       
   363 
       
   364 {\obeylines %
       
   365   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
       
   366     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
       
   367     %
       
   368     % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
       
   369     % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
       
   370     \argremovec #1\c\relax %
       
   371     \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
       
   372     %
       
   373     % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
       
   374     \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
       
   375   }%
       
   376 }
       
   377 
       
   378 % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
       
   379 % do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
       
   380 % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
       
   381 % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
       
   382 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
       
   383 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
       
   384 
       
   385 % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
       
   386 %    @end itemize  @c foo
       
   387 % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
       
   388 % `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
       
   389 % result to \toks0.
       
   390 %
       
   391 % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
       
   392 % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
       
   393 % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
       
   394 % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
       
   395 % here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
       
   396 % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
       
   397 % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
       
   398 %
       
   399 \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
       
   400   \begingroup
       
   401     \ignoreactivespaces
       
   402     \edef\temp{#1}%
       
   403     \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
       
   404   \endgroup
       
   405 }
       
   406 
       
   407 % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
       
   408 %
       
   409 \begingroup
       
   410   \obeyspaces
       
   411   \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
       
   412 \endgroup
       
   413 
       
   414 
       
   415 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
       
   416 
       
   417 %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
       
   418 %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
       
   419 \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
       
   420 \def\ENVcheck{%
       
   421 \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
       
   422 \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
       
   423 
       
   424 % @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
       
   425 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
       
   426 
       
   427 \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
       
   428 
       
   429 \def\beginxxx #1{%
       
   430 \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
       
   431 {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
       
   432 \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
       
   433 
       
   434 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
       
   435 %
       
   436 \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
       
   437 \def\endxxx #1{%
       
   438   \removeactivespaces{#1}%
       
   439   \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
       
   440   %
       
   441   \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
       
   442     \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
       
   443       % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
       
   444       \errhelp = \EMsimple
       
   445       \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
       
   446     \else
       
   447       \unmatchedenderror\endthing
       
   448     \fi
       
   449   \else
       
   450     % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
       
   451     \csname E\endthing\endcsname
       
   452   \fi
       
   453 }
       
   454 
       
   455 % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
       
   456 %
       
   457 \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
       
   458   \errhelp = \EMsimple
       
   459   \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
       
   460 }
       
   461 
       
   462 % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
       
   463 %
       
   464 \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
       
   465   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
       
   466 }
       
   467 
       
   468 
       
   469 %% Simple single-character @ commands
       
   470 
       
   471 % @@ prints an @
       
   472 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
       
   473 \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
       
   474 
       
   475 % This is turned off because it was never documented
       
   476 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
       
   477 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
       
   478 %% but suppressing ligatures.
       
   479 %\def\`{{`}}
       
   480 %\def\'{{'}}
       
   481 
       
   482 % Used to generate quoted braces.
       
   483 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
       
   484 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
       
   485 \let\{=\mylbrace
       
   486 \let\}=\myrbrace
       
   487 \begingroup
       
   488   % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
       
   489   % and @{ and @} for the aux file.
       
   490   \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
       
   491   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
       
   492   \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
       
   493   !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
       
   494   !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
       
   495   !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
       
   496   !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
       
   497 !endgroup
       
   498 
       
   499 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
       
   500 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
       
   501 \let\, = \c
       
   502 \let\dotaccent = \.
       
   503 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
       
   504 \let\tieaccent = \t
       
   505 \let\ubaraccent = \b
       
   506 \let\udotaccent = \d
       
   507 
       
   508 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
       
   509 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
       
   510 \def\questiondown{?`}
       
   511 \def\exclamdown{!`}
       
   512 
       
   513 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
       
   514 \def\imacro{i}
       
   515 \def\jmacro{j}
       
   516 \def\dotless#1{%
       
   517   \def\temp{#1}%
       
   518   \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
       
   519   \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
       
   520   \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
       
   521   \fi\fi
       
   522 }
       
   523 
       
   524 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
       
   525 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
       
   526 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
       
   527 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
       
   528 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
       
   529 {\catcode`@ = 11
       
   530  % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
       
   531  % if the definition is written into an index file.
       
   532  \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
       
   533  \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
       
   534 }
       
   535 
       
   536 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
       
   537 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
       
   538 
       
   539 % @* forces a line break.
       
   540 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
       
   541 
       
   542 % @/ allows a line break.
       
   543 \let\/=\allowbreak
       
   544 
       
   545 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
       
   546 \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
       
   547 
       
   548 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
       
   549 \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
       
   550 
       
   551 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
       
   552 \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
       
   553 
       
   554 % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
       
   555 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
       
   556 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
       
   557 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
       
   558 
       
   559 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
       
   560 % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
       
   561 % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
       
   562 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
       
   563 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
       
   564 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
       
   565 % the text is small, which looks bad.
       
   566 %
       
   567 % Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
       
   568 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
       
   569 % does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
       
   570 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
       
   571 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
       
   572 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
       
   573 %
       
   574 \newbox\groupbox
       
   575 \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
       
   576 %
       
   577 \def\group{\begingroup
       
   578   \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
       
   579     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
       
   580     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
       
   581   \fi
       
   582   %
       
   583   % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
       
   584   % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
       
   585   % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
       
   586   % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
       
   587   % above.  But it's pretty close.
       
   588   \def\Egroup{%
       
   589     \egroup           % End the \vtop.
       
   590     % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
       
   591     \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
       
   592     % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
       
   593     \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
       
   594     % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
       
   595     % group, force a page break.
       
   596     \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
       
   597       \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
       
   598         \page
       
   599       \fi
       
   600     \fi
       
   601     \copy\groupbox
       
   602     \endgroup         % End the \group.
       
   603   }%
       
   604   %
       
   605   \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
       
   606     % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
       
   607     % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
       
   608     % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
       
   609     % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
       
   610     % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
       
   611     % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
       
   612     \everypar = {\strut}%
       
   613     %
       
   614     % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
       
   615     % normal interline spacing.
       
   616     \offinterlineskip
       
   617     %
       
   618     % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
       
   619     % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
       
   620     % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
       
   621     % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
       
   622     % empty paragraph.
       
   623     \ifx\par\lisppar
       
   624       \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
       
   625       %
       
   626       % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
       
   627       \obeylines
       
   628     \fi
       
   629     %
       
   630     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
       
   631     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
       
   632     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
       
   633     % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
       
   634     % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
       
   635     % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
       
   636     \comment
       
   637 }
       
   638 %
       
   639 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
       
   640 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
       
   641 %
       
   642 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
       
   643 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
       
   644 where each line of input produces a line of output.}
       
   645 
       
   646 % @need space-in-mils
       
   647 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
       
   648 
       
   649 \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
       
   650 
       
   651 \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
       
   652 
       
   653 % Old definition--didn't work.
       
   654 %\def\needx #1{\par %
       
   655 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
       
   656 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
       
   657 %{\baselineskip=0pt%
       
   658 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
       
   659 %\prevdepth=-1000pt
       
   660 %}}
       
   661 
       
   662 \def\needx#1{%
       
   663   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
       
   664   % paragraph.
       
   665   \par
       
   666   %
       
   667   % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
       
   668   \dimen0 = #1\mil
       
   669   \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
       
   670   \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
       
   671   \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
       
   672     %
       
   673     % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
       
   674     % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
       
   675     % And a page break here is fine.
       
   676     \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
       
   677     %
       
   678     % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
       
   679     % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
       
   680     % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
       
   681     % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
       
   682     % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
       
   683     %
       
   684     % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
       
   685     % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
       
   686     % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
       
   687     % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
       
   688     % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
       
   689     % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
       
   690     % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
       
   691     \penalty9999
       
   692     %
       
   693     % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
       
   694     \kern -#1\mil
       
   695     %
       
   696     % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
       
   697     \nobreak
       
   698   \fi
       
   699 }
       
   700 
       
   701 % @br   forces paragraph break
       
   702 
       
   703 \let\br = \par
       
   704 
       
   705 % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
       
   706 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
       
   707 % font as three actual period characters.
       
   708 %
       
   709 \def\dots{%
       
   710   \leavevmode
       
   711   \hbox to 1.5em{%
       
   712     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
       
   713     .\hss.\hss.%
       
   714     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
       
   715   }%
       
   716 }
       
   717 
       
   718 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
       
   719 %
       
   720 \def\enddots{%
       
   721   \leavevmode
       
   722   \hbox to 2em{%
       
   723     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
       
   724     .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
       
   725     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
       
   726   }%
       
   727   \spacefactor=3000
       
   728 }
       
   729 
       
   730 % @page forces the start of a new page.
       
   731 %
       
   732 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
       
   733 
       
   734 % @exdent text....
       
   735 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
       
   736 
       
   737 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
       
   738 % That's how much \exdent should take out.
       
   739 \newskip\exdentamount
       
   740 
       
   741 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
       
   742 \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
       
   743 \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
       
   744 
       
   745 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
       
   746 \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
       
   747 \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
       
   748 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
       
   749 
       
   750 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
       
   751 % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
       
   752 % class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
       
   753 %
       
   754 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
       
   755 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
       
   756 %
       
   757 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
       
   758   \nobreak
       
   759   \kern-\strutdepth
       
   760   \vtop to \strutdepth{%
       
   761     \baselineskip=\strutdepth
       
   762     \vss
       
   763     % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
       
   764     % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
       
   765     \ifx#1l%
       
   766       \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
       
   767     \else
       
   768       \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
       
   769     \fi
       
   770     \null
       
   771   }%
       
   772 }}
       
   773 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
       
   774 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
       
   775 %
       
   776 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
       
   777 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
       
   778 % else use TEXT for both).
       
   779 %
       
   780 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
       
   781 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
       
   782   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
       
   783   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
       
   784     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
       
   785     \def\righttext{#2}%
       
   786   \else
       
   787     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
       
   788     \def\righttext{#1}%
       
   789   \fi
       
   790   %
       
   791   \ifodd\pageno
       
   792     \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
       
   793   \else
       
   794     \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
       
   795   \fi
       
   796   \temp
       
   797 }
       
   798 
       
   799 % @include file    insert text of that file as input.
       
   800 % Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
       
   801 \def\include{\begingroup
       
   802   \catcode`\\=\other
       
   803   \catcode`~=\other
       
   804   \catcode`^=\other
       
   805   \catcode`_=\other
       
   806   \catcode`|=\other
       
   807   \catcode`<=\other
       
   808   \catcode`>=\other
       
   809   \catcode`+=\other
       
   810   \parsearg\includezzz}
       
   811 % Restore active chars for included file.
       
   812 \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
       
   813   % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
       
   814   \def\thisfile{#1}%
       
   815   \let\value=\expandablevalue
       
   816   \input\thisfile
       
   817 \endgroup}
       
   818 
       
   819 \def\thisfile{}
       
   820 
       
   821 % @center line
       
   822 % outputs that line, centered.
       
   823 %
       
   824 \def\center{\parsearg\docenter}
       
   825 \def\docenter#1{{%
       
   826   \ifhmode \hfil\break \fi
       
   827   \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
       
   828   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
       
   829   \line{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
       
   830   \ifhmode \break \fi
       
   831 }}
       
   832 
       
   833 % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
       
   834 
       
   835 \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
       
   836 \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
       
   837 
       
   838 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
       
   839 % @c is the same as @comment
       
   840 % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
       
   841 
       
   842 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
       
   843 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
       
   844 \commentxxx}
       
   845 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
       
   846 
       
   847 \let\c=\comment
       
   848 
       
   849 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
       
   850 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
       
   851 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
       
   852 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
       
   853 %
       
   854 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
       
   855 \def\noneword{none}
       
   856 %
       
   857 \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
       
   858 \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
       
   859   \def\temp{#1}%
       
   860   \ifx\temp\asisword
       
   861   \else
       
   862     \ifx\temp\noneword
       
   863       \defaultparindent = 0pt
       
   864     \else
       
   865       \defaultparindent = #1em
       
   866     \fi
       
   867   \fi
       
   868   \parindent = \defaultparindent
       
   869 }
       
   870 
       
   871 % @exampleindent NCHARS
       
   872 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
       
   873 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
       
   874 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
       
   875 \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
       
   876 \def\doexampleindent#1{%
       
   877   \def\temp{#1}%
       
   878   \ifx\temp\asisword
       
   879   \else
       
   880     \ifx\temp\noneword
       
   881       \lispnarrowing = 0pt
       
   882     \else
       
   883       \lispnarrowing = #1em
       
   884     \fi
       
   885   \fi
       
   886 }
       
   887 
       
   888 % @firstparagraphindent WORD
       
   889 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
       
   890 % after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
       
   891 % paragraphs.
       
   892 %
       
   893 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
       
   894 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
       
   895 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
       
   896 % By default, we suppress indentation.
       
   897 %
       
   898 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
       
   899 \newdimen\currentparindent
       
   900 %
       
   901 \def\insertword{insert}
       
   902 %
       
   903 \def\firstparagraphindent{\parsearg\dofirstparagraphindent}
       
   904 \def\dofirstparagraphindent#1{%
       
   905   \def\temp{#1}%
       
   906   \ifx\temp\noneword
       
   907     \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
       
   908   \else\ifx\temp\insertword
       
   909     \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
       
   910   \else
       
   911     \errhelp = \EMsimple
       
   912     \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
       
   913   \fi\fi
       
   914 }
       
   915 
       
   916 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
       
   917 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
       
   918 %
       
   919 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
       
   920 % paragraph.
       
   921 %
       
   922 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
       
   923   \gdef\indent{%
       
   924     \global\let\indent=\ptexindent
       
   925     \global\everypar = {}%
       
   926   }%
       
   927   \global\everypar = {%
       
   928     \kern-\parindent
       
   929     \global\let\indent=\ptexindent
       
   930     \global\everypar = {}%
       
   931   }%
       
   932 }%
       
   933 
       
   934 
       
   935 % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
       
   936 %
       
   937 \def\asis#1{#1}
       
   938 
       
   939 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
       
   940 % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
       
   941 % to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
       
   942 % superscripts, special math chars, etc.
       
   943 %
       
   944 \let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
       
   945 %
       
   946 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
       
   947 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
       
   948 % _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
       
   949 % if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
       
   950 %
       
   951 {\catcode\underChar = \active
       
   952 \gdef\mathunderscore{%
       
   953   \catcode\underChar=\active
       
   954   \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
       
   955 }}
       
   956 %
       
   957 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
       
   958 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
       
   959 % this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
       
   960 % otherwise define @\.
       
   961 %
       
   962 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
       
   963 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
       
   964 %
       
   965 \def\math{%
       
   966   \tex
       
   967   \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
       
   968   \let\\ = \mathbackslash
       
   969   \mathactive
       
   970   \implicitmath\finishmath}
       
   971 \def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
       
   972 
       
   973 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
       
   974 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an
       
   975 % argument to a command which set the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
       
   976 %
       
   977 {
       
   978   \catcode`^ = \active
       
   979   \catcode`< = \active
       
   980   \catcode`> = \active
       
   981   \catcode`+ = \active
       
   982   \gdef\mathactive{%
       
   983     \let^ = \ptexhat
       
   984     \let< = \ptexless
       
   985     \let> = \ptexgtr
       
   986     \let+ = \ptexplus
       
   987   }
       
   988 }
       
   989 
       
   990 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
       
   991 \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
       
   992 \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
       
   993 
       
   994 % @refill is a no-op.
       
   995 \let\refill=\relax
       
   996 
       
   997 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
       
   998 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
       
   999 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
       
  1000 %
       
  1001 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
       
  1002 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
       
  1003 
       
  1004 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
       
  1005 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
       
  1006 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
       
  1007 \def\setfilename{%
       
  1008    \iflinks
       
  1009      \readauxfile
       
  1010    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
       
  1011    \openindices
       
  1012    \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
       
  1013    \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
       
  1014    %
       
  1015    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
       
  1016    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
       
  1017    % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
       
  1018    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
       
  1019    \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
       
  1020    \closein1
       
  1021    \temp
       
  1022    %
       
  1023    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
       
  1024 }
       
  1025 
       
  1026 % Called from \setfilename.
       
  1027 %
       
  1028 \def\openindices{%
       
  1029   \newindex{cp}%
       
  1030   \newcodeindex{fn}%
       
  1031   \newcodeindex{vr}%
       
  1032   \newcodeindex{tp}%
       
  1033   \newcodeindex{ky}%
       
  1034   \newcodeindex{pg}%
       
  1035 }
       
  1036 
       
  1037 % @bye.
       
  1038 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
       
  1039 
       
  1040 
       
  1041 \message{pdf,}
       
  1042 % adobe `portable' document format
       
  1043 \newcount\tempnum
       
  1044 \newcount\lnkcount
       
  1045 \newtoks\filename
       
  1046 \newcount\filenamelength
       
  1047 \newcount\pgn
       
  1048 \newtoks\toksA
       
  1049 \newtoks\toksB
       
  1050 \newtoks\toksC
       
  1051 \newtoks\toksD
       
  1052 \newbox\boxA
       
  1053 \newcount\countA
       
  1054 \newif\ifpdf
       
  1055 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
       
  1056 
       
  1057 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
       
  1058   \pdffalse
       
  1059   \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
       
  1060   \let\pdfurl = \gobble
       
  1061   \let\endlink = \relax
       
  1062   \let\linkcolor = \relax
       
  1063   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
       
  1064 \else
       
  1065   \pdftrue
       
  1066   \pdfoutput = 1
       
  1067   \input pdfcolor
       
  1068   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
       
  1069     \def\imagewidth{#2}%
       
  1070     \def\imageheight{#3}%
       
  1071     % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
       
  1072     % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
       
  1073     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
       
  1074       \immediate\pdfimage
       
  1075     \else
       
  1076       \immediate\pdfximage
       
  1077     \fi
       
  1078       \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
       
  1079       \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
       
  1080       \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
       
  1081          #1.pdf%
       
  1082        \else
       
  1083          {#1.pdf}%
       
  1084        \fi
       
  1085     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
       
  1086       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
       
  1087     \fi}
       
  1088   \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
       
  1089   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
       
  1090   \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
       
  1091   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
       
  1092   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
       
  1093   % come from Petr Olsak
       
  1094   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
       
  1095     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
       
  1096   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
       
  1097     \advance\tempnum by1
       
  1098     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
       
  1099   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
       
  1100     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
       
  1101     \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
       
  1102       \closein 1
       
  1103       % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
       
  1104       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
       
  1105       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
       
  1106       %
       
  1107       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
       
  1108       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
       
  1109       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
       
  1110       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
       
  1111       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
       
  1112       \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
       
  1113       \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
       
  1114       \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
       
  1115       \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
       
  1116       \input \jobname.toc
       
  1117       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
       
  1118         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
       
  1119       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
       
  1120         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
       
  1121       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
       
  1122         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
       
  1123       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
       
  1124         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
       
  1125       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
       
  1126       \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
       
  1127       \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
       
  1128       \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
       
  1129       \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
       
  1130       %
       
  1131       % Make special characters normal for writing to the pdf file.
       
  1132       %
       
  1133       \indexnofonts
       
  1134       \let\tt=\relax
       
  1135       \turnoffactive
       
  1136       \input \jobname.toc
       
  1137     \endgroup\fi
       
  1138   }}
       
  1139   \def\makelinks #1,{%
       
  1140     \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
       
  1141     \ifx\params\E
       
  1142       \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
       
  1143     \else
       
  1144       \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
       
  1145       \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
       
  1146       \picknum{#1}%
       
  1147       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
       
  1148         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
       
  1149       \linkcolor #1%
       
  1150       \advance\lnkcount by 1%
       
  1151       \endlink
       
  1152     \fi
       
  1153     \nextmakelinks
       
  1154   }
       
  1155   \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
       
  1156   \def\pn#1{%
       
  1157     \def\p{#1}%
       
  1158     \ifx\p\lbrace
       
  1159       \let\nextpn=\ppn
       
  1160     \else
       
  1161       \let\nextpn=\ppnn
       
  1162       \def\first{#1}
       
  1163     \fi
       
  1164     \nextpn
       
  1165   }
       
  1166   \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
       
  1167   \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
       
  1168   \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
       
  1169   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
       
  1170   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
       
  1171     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
       
  1172     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
       
  1173       \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
       
  1174         \advance\filenamelength by 1
       
  1175       \fi
       
  1176     \fi
       
  1177     \nextsp}
       
  1178   \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
       
  1179   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
       
  1180     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
       
  1181   \else
       
  1182     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
       
  1183   \fi
       
  1184   \def\pdfurl#1{%
       
  1185     \begingroup
       
  1186       \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
       
  1187       \let\value=\expandablevalue
       
  1188       \leavevmode\Red
       
  1189       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
       
  1190         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
       
  1191         % #1
       
  1192     \endgroup}
       
  1193   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
       
  1194   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
       
  1195   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
       
  1196   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
       
  1197   \def\maketoks{%
       
  1198     \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
       
  1199     \ifx\first0\adn0
       
  1200     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
       
  1201     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
       
  1202     \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
       
  1203     \else
       
  1204       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
       
  1205       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
       
  1206         \let\next=\maketoks
       
  1207         \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
       
  1208         \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
       
  1209       \fi
       
  1210     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
       
  1211     \next}
       
  1212   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
       
  1213     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
       
  1214   \def\pdflink#1{%
       
  1215     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
       
  1216     \linkcolor #1\endlink}
       
  1217   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
       
  1218 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
       
  1219 
       
  1220 
       
  1221 \message{fonts,}
       
  1222 % Font-change commands.
       
  1223 
       
  1224 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
       
  1225 % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
       
  1226 \newfam\sffam
       
  1227 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
       
  1228 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
       
  1229 
       
  1230 % We don't need math for this one.
       
  1231 \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
       
  1232 
       
  1233 % Default leading.
       
  1234 \newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
       
  1235 
       
  1236 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
       
  1237 % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
       
  1238 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
       
  1239 %
       
  1240 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
       
  1241 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
       
  1242 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
       
  1243 %
       
  1244 \def\setleading#1{%
       
  1245   \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
       
  1246   \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
       
  1247   \normalbaselines
       
  1248   \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
       
  1249     \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
       
  1250                     depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
       
  1251   }%
       
  1252 }
       
  1253 
       
  1254 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
       
  1255 % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
       
  1256 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
       
  1257 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
       
  1258 
       
  1259 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
       
  1260 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
       
  1261 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
       
  1262 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
       
  1263 \def\fontprefix{cm}
       
  1264 \fi
       
  1265 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
       
  1266 \def\rmshape{r}
       
  1267 \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
       
  1268 \def\bfshape{b}
       
  1269 \def\bxshape{bx}
       
  1270 \def\ttshape{tt}
       
  1271 \def\ttbshape{tt}
       
  1272 \def\ttslshape{sltt}
       
  1273 \def\itshape{ti}
       
  1274 \def\itbshape{bxti}
       
  1275 \def\slshape{sl}
       
  1276 \def\slbshape{bxsl}
       
  1277 \def\sfshape{ss}
       
  1278 \def\sfbshape{ss}
       
  1279 \def\scshape{csc}
       
  1280 \def\scbshape{csc}
       
  1281 
       
  1282 \newcount\mainmagstep
       
  1283 \ifx\bigger\relax
       
  1284   % not really supported.
       
  1285   \mainmagstep=\magstep1
       
  1286   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
       
  1287   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
       
  1288 \else
       
  1289   \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
       
  1290   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1291   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1292 \fi
       
  1293 % Instead of cmb10, you may want to use cmbx10.
       
  1294 % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
       
  1295 % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10
       
  1296 % (in Bob's opinion).
       
  1297 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1298 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1299 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1300 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1301 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1302 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
       
  1303 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
       
  1304 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
       
  1305 
       
  1306 % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
       
  1307 \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
       
  1308 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
       
  1309 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
       
  1310 
       
  1311 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
       
  1312 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
       
  1313 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
       
  1314 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
       
  1315 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
       
  1316 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
       
  1317 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
       
  1318 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
       
  1319 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
       
  1320 \font\smalli=cmmi9
       
  1321 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
       
  1322 
       
  1323 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
       
  1324 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
       
  1325 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
       
  1326 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
       
  1327 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
       
  1328 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
       
  1329 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
       
  1330 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
       
  1331 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
       
  1332 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
       
  1333 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
       
  1334 
       
  1335 % Fonts for title page:
       
  1336 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
       
  1337 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
       
  1338 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
       
  1339 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
       
  1340 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
       
  1341 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
       
  1342 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
       
  1343 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
       
  1344 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
       
  1345 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
       
  1346 \def\authorrm{\secrm}
       
  1347 \def\authortt{\sectt}
       
  1348 
       
  1349 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
       
  1350 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
       
  1351 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
       
  1352 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
       
  1353 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
       
  1354 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
       
  1355 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
       
  1356 \let\chapbf=\chaprm
       
  1357 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
       
  1358 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
       
  1359 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
       
  1360 
       
  1361 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
       
  1362 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
       
  1363 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
       
  1364 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
       
  1365 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
       
  1366 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
       
  1367 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
       
  1368 \let\secbf\secrm
       
  1369 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
       
  1370 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
       
  1371 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
       
  1372 
       
  1373 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
       
  1374 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
       
  1375 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
       
  1376 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
       
  1377 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
       
  1378 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
       
  1379 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
       
  1380 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
       
  1381 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
       
  1382 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
       
  1383 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
       
  1384 % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
       
  1385 % but that is not a standard magnification.
       
  1386 
       
  1387 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
       
  1388 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
       
  1389 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
       
  1390 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
       
  1391 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
       
  1392 %
       
  1393 \def\resetmathfonts{%
       
  1394   \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
       
  1395   \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
       
  1396   \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
       
  1397 }
       
  1398 
       
  1399 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
       
  1400 % of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
       
  1401 % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
       
  1402 % cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
       
  1403 % \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
       
  1404 % redefine \bf itself.
       
  1405 \def\textfonts{%
       
  1406   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
       
  1407   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
       
  1408   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
       
  1409   \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
       
  1410 \def\titlefonts{%
       
  1411   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
       
  1412   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
       
  1413   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
       
  1414   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
       
  1415   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
       
  1416 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
       
  1417 \def\chapfonts{%
       
  1418   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
       
  1419   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
       
  1420   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
       
  1421   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
       
  1422 \def\secfonts{%
       
  1423   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
       
  1424   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
       
  1425   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
       
  1426   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
       
  1427 \def\subsecfonts{%
       
  1428   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
       
  1429   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
       
  1430   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
       
  1431   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
       
  1432 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
       
  1433 \def\smallfonts{%
       
  1434   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
       
  1435   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
       
  1436   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
       
  1437   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
       
  1438   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
       
  1439 \def\smallerfonts{%
       
  1440   \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
       
  1441   \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
       
  1442   \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
       
  1443   \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
       
  1444   \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
       
  1445 
       
  1446 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
       
  1447 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
       
  1448 
       
  1449 % About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
       
  1450 % can fit this many characters:
       
  1451 %   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
       
  1452 % If we use \smallerfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
       
  1453 %   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
       
  1454 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
       
  1455 % the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
       
  1456 %
       
  1457 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
       
  1458 %   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
       
  1459 %
       
  1460 % I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.
       
  1461 %
       
  1462 % --karl, 24jan03.
       
  1463 
       
  1464 
       
  1465 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
       
  1466 %
       
  1467 \textfonts
       
  1468 
       
  1469 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
       
  1470 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
       
  1471 \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
       
  1472 
       
  1473 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
       
  1474 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
       
  1475 
       
  1476 % Fonts for short table of contents.
       
  1477 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
       
  1478 \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
       
  1479 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
       
  1480 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
       
  1481 
       
  1482 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
       
  1483 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
       
  1484 
       
  1485 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
       
  1486 % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
       
  1487 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
       
  1488                     \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
       
  1489 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
       
  1490 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
       
  1491 
       
  1492 \let\i=\smartitalic
       
  1493 \let\var=\smartslanted
       
  1494 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
       
  1495 \let\emph=\smartitalic
       
  1496 \let\cite=\smartslanted
       
  1497 
       
  1498 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
       
  1499 \let\strong=\b
       
  1500 
       
  1501 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
       
  1502 % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
       
  1503 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
       
  1504 %
       
  1505 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
       
  1506 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
       
  1507 
       
  1508 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
       
  1509 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
       
  1510 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
       
  1511 %
       
  1512 \catcode`@=11
       
  1513   \def\frenchspacing{%
       
  1514     \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
       
  1515     \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
       
  1516   }
       
  1517 \catcode`@=\other
       
  1518 
       
  1519 \def\t#1{%
       
  1520   {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
       
  1521   \null
       
  1522 }
       
  1523 \let\ttfont=\t
       
  1524 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
       
  1525 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
       
  1526 \font\keysy=cmsy9
       
  1527 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
       
  1528   \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
       
  1529     \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
       
  1530      \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
       
  1531     \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
       
  1532   \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
       
  1533 % The old definition, with no lozenge:
       
  1534 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
       
  1535 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
       
  1536 
       
  1537 % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
       
  1538 \let\file=\samp
       
  1539 \let\option=\samp
       
  1540 
       
  1541 % @code is a modification of @t,
       
  1542 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
       
  1543 \def\tclose#1{%
       
  1544   {%
       
  1545     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
       
  1546     \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
       
  1547     %
       
  1548     % Switch to typewriter.
       
  1549     \tt
       
  1550     %
       
  1551     % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
       
  1552     \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
       
  1553     %
       
  1554     % Turn off hyphenation.
       
  1555     \nohyphenation
       
  1556     %
       
  1557     \rawbackslash
       
  1558     \frenchspacing
       
  1559     #1%
       
  1560   }%
       
  1561   \null
       
  1562 }
       
  1563 
       
  1564 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
       
  1565 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
       
  1566 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
       
  1567 
       
  1568 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
       
  1569 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
       
  1570 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
       
  1571 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
       
  1572 %  -- rms.
       
  1573 {
       
  1574   \catcode`\-=\active
       
  1575   \catcode`\_=\active
       
  1576   %
       
  1577   \global\def\code{\begingroup
       
  1578     \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
       
  1579     \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
       
  1580     \codex
       
  1581   }
       
  1582   %
       
  1583   % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
       
  1584   % just treat them as a normal -.
       
  1585   \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
       
  1586 }
       
  1587 
       
  1588 \def\realdash{-}
       
  1589 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
       
  1590 \def\codeunder{%
       
  1591   % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
       
  1592   % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
       
  1593   % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
       
  1594   % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
       
  1595   \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
       
  1596                \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
       
  1597              \else\normalunderscore \fi
       
  1598              \discretionary{}{}{}}%
       
  1599             {\_}%
       
  1600 }
       
  1601 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
       
  1602 
       
  1603 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
       
  1604 % then @kbd has no effect.
       
  1605 
       
  1606 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
       
  1607 %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
       
  1608 %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
       
  1609 \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
       
  1610 \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
       
  1611   \def\arg{#1}%
       
  1612   \ifx\arg\worddistinct
       
  1613     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
       
  1614   \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
       
  1615     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
       
  1616   \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
       
  1617     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
       
  1618   \else
       
  1619     \errhelp = \EMsimple
       
  1620     \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}%
       
  1621   \fi\fi\fi
       
  1622 }
       
  1623 \def\worddistinct{distinct}
       
  1624 \def\wordexample{example}
       
  1625 \def\wordcode{code}
       
  1626 
       
  1627 % Default is `distinct.'
       
  1628 \kbdinputstyle distinct
       
  1629 
       
  1630 \def\xkey{\key}
       
  1631 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
       
  1632 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
       
  1633 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
       
  1634 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
       
  1635 
       
  1636 % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
       
  1637 \let\url=\code
       
  1638 \let\env=\code
       
  1639 \let\command=\code
       
  1640 
       
  1641 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
       
  1642 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
       
  1643 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
       
  1644 % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
       
  1645 % a hypertex \special here.
       
  1646 %
       
  1647 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
       
  1648 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
       
  1649   \unsepspaces
       
  1650   \pdfurl{#1}%
       
  1651   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
       
  1652   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
       
  1653     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
       
  1654   \else
       
  1655     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
       
  1656     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
       
  1657       \ifpdf
       
  1658         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
       
  1659       \else
       
  1660         \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
       
  1661       \fi
       
  1662     \else
       
  1663       \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
       
  1664     \fi
       
  1665   \fi
       
  1666   \endlink
       
  1667 \endgroup}
       
  1668 
       
  1669 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
       
  1670 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
       
  1671 %
       
  1672 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
       
  1673 \ifpdf
       
  1674   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
       
  1675   \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
       
  1676     \unsepspaces
       
  1677     \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
       
  1678     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
       
  1679     \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
       
  1680     \endlink
       
  1681   \endgroup}
       
  1682 \else
       
  1683   \let\email=\uref
       
  1684 \fi
       
  1685 
       
  1686 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
       
  1687 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
       
  1688 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
       
  1689 % this property, we can check that font parameter.
       
  1690 %
       
  1691 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
       
  1692 
       
  1693 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
       
  1694 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
       
  1695 %
       
  1696 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
       
  1697 
       
  1698 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
       
  1699 
       
  1700 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
       
  1701 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
       
  1702 % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
       
  1703 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
       
  1704 
       
  1705 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
       
  1706 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
       
  1707 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
       
  1708 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
       
  1709 
       
  1710 % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
       
  1711 \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
       
  1712 
       
  1713 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
       
  1714 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
       
  1715 
       
  1716 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  For now, only works in text size;
       
  1717 % we'd have to redo the font mechanism to change the \scriptstyle and
       
  1718 % \scriptscriptstyle font sizes to make it look right in headings.
       
  1719 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
       
  1720 %
       
  1721 \def\registeredsymbol{%
       
  1722   $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm R$}\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
       
  1723     }$%
       
  1724 }
       
  1725 
       
  1726 
       
  1727 \message{page headings,}
       
  1728 
       
  1729 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
       
  1730 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
       
  1731 
       
  1732 % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
       
  1733 \newif\ifseenauthor
       
  1734 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
       
  1735 
       
  1736 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
       
  1737 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
       
  1738 %
       
  1739 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
       
  1740  \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
       
  1741 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
       
  1742  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
       
  1743 
       
  1744 \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
       
  1745 \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
       
  1746         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
       
  1747 
       
  1748 \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
       
  1749    \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
       
  1750    \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
       
  1751    %
       
  1752    \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
       
  1753                    \let\tt=\authortt}%
       
  1754    %
       
  1755    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
       
  1756    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
       
  1757    %
       
  1758    % Now you can print the title using @title.
       
  1759    \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
       
  1760    \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
       
  1761                     % print a rule at the page bottom also.
       
  1762                     \finishedtitlepagefalse
       
  1763                     \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
       
  1764    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
       
  1765    \finishedtitlepagetrue
       
  1766    %
       
  1767    % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
       
  1768    \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
       
  1769    \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
       
  1770    %
       
  1771    % @author should come last, but may come many times.
       
  1772    \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
       
  1773    \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
       
  1774       {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
       
  1775    %
       
  1776    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
       
  1777    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
       
  1778    \let\oldpage = \page
       
  1779    \def\page{%
       
  1780       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
       
  1781          \finishtitlepage
       
  1782       \fi
       
  1783       \oldpage
       
  1784       \let\page = \oldpage
       
  1785       \hbox{}}%
       
  1786 %   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
       
  1787 }
       
  1788 
       
  1789 \def\Etitlepage{%
       
  1790    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
       
  1791       \finishtitlepage
       
  1792    \fi
       
  1793    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
       
  1794    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
       
  1795    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
       
  1796    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
       
  1797    \oldpage
       
  1798    \endgroup
       
  1799    %
       
  1800    % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
       
  1801    % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
       
  1802    \HEADINGSon
       
  1803    %
       
  1804    % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
       
  1805    \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
       
  1806      \shortcontents
       
  1807      \contents
       
  1808      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
       
  1809      \global\let\contents = \relax
       
  1810    \fi
       
  1811    %
       
  1812    \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
       
  1813      \contents
       
  1814      \global\let\contents = \relax
       
  1815      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
       
  1816    \fi
       
  1817 }
       
  1818 
       
  1819 \def\finishtitlepage{%
       
  1820    \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
       
  1821    \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
       
  1822    \finishedtitlepagetrue
       
  1823 }
       
  1824 
       
  1825 %%% Set up page headings and footings.
       
  1826 
       
  1827 \let\thispage=\folio
       
  1828 
       
  1829 \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
       
  1830 \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
       
  1831 \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
       
  1832 \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
       
  1833 
       
  1834 % Now make Tex use those variables
       
  1835 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
       
  1836                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
       
  1837 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
       
  1838                             \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
       
  1839 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
       
  1840 
       
  1841 % Commands to set those variables.
       
  1842 % For example, this is what  @headings on  does
       
  1843 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
       
  1844 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
       
  1845 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
       
  1846 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
       
  1847 
       
  1848 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
       
  1849 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
       
  1850 \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
       
  1851 
       
  1852 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
       
  1853 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
       
  1854 \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
       
  1855 
       
  1856 {\catcode`\@=0 %
       
  1857 
       
  1858 \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
       
  1859 \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
       
  1860 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
       
  1861 
       
  1862 \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
       
  1863 \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
       
  1864 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
       
  1865 
       
  1866 \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
       
  1867 
       
  1868 \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
       
  1869 \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
       
  1870 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
       
  1871 
       
  1872 \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
       
  1873 \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
       
  1874   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
       
  1875   %
       
  1876   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
       
  1877   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
       
  1878   \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
       
  1879   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
       
  1880 }
       
  1881 
       
  1882 \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
       
  1883 %
       
  1884 }% unbind the catcode of @.
       
  1885 
       
  1886 % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
       
  1887 % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
       
  1888 % @headings off         turns them off.
       
  1889 % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
       
  1890 % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
       
  1891 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
       
  1892 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
       
  1893 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
       
  1894 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
       
  1895 
       
  1896 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
       
  1897 
       
  1898 \def\HEADINGSoff{
       
  1899 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
       
  1900 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
       
  1901 \HEADINGSoff
       
  1902 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
       
  1903 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
       
  1904 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
       
  1905 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
       
  1906 % edge of all pages.
       
  1907 \def\HEADINGSdouble{
       
  1908 \global\pageno=1
       
  1909 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
       
  1910 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
       
  1911 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
       
  1912 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
       
  1913 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
       
  1914 }
       
  1915 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
       
  1916 
       
  1917 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
       
  1918 % page number on top right.
       
  1919 \def\HEADINGSsingle{
       
  1920 \global\pageno=1
       
  1921 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
       
  1922 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
       
  1923 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
       
  1924 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
       
  1925 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
       
  1926 }
       
  1927 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
       
  1928 
       
  1929 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
       
  1930 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
       
  1931 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
       
  1932 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
       
  1933 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
       
  1934 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
       
  1935 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
       
  1936 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
       
  1937 }
       
  1938 
       
  1939 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
       
  1940 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
       
  1941 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
       
  1942 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
       
  1943 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
       
  1944 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
       
  1945 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
       
  1946 }
       
  1947 
       
  1948 % Subroutines used in generating headings
       
  1949 % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
       
  1950 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
       
  1951 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
       
  1952 \ifx\today\undefined
       
  1953 \def\today{%
       
  1954   \number\day\space
       
  1955   \ifcase\month
       
  1956   \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
       
  1957   \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
       
  1958   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
       
  1959   \fi
       
  1960   \space\number\year}
       
  1961 \fi
       
  1962 
       
  1963 % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
       
  1964 % It generates no output of its own.
       
  1965 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
       
  1966 \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
       
  1967 \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
       
  1968 
       
  1969 
       
  1970 \message{tables,}
       
  1971 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
       
  1972 
       
  1973 % default indentation of table text
       
  1974 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
       
  1975 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
       
  1976 \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
       
  1977 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
       
  1978 \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
       
  1979 
       
  1980 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
       
  1981 \newdimen\itemmax
       
  1982 
       
  1983 % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
       
  1984 % these defs.
       
  1985 % They also define \itemindex
       
  1986 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
       
  1987 
       
  1988 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
       
  1989 
       
  1990 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
       
  1991 
       
  1992 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
       
  1993 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
       
  1994 
       
  1995 \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
       
  1996 \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
       
  1997 
       
  1998 \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
       
  1999 \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
       
  2000 
       
  2001 \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
       
  2002                  \itemzzz {#1}}
       
  2003 
       
  2004 \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
       
  2005                  \itemzzz {#1}}
       
  2006 
       
  2007 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
       
  2008   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
       
  2009   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
       
  2010   \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
       
  2011   \itemindex{#1}%
       
  2012   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
       
  2013   %
       
  2014   % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
       
  2015   % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
       
  2016   % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
       
  2017   % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
       
  2018   % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
       
  2019   \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
       
  2020     %
       
  2021     % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
       
  2022     % but leave it ragged-right.
       
  2023     \begingroup
       
  2024       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
       
  2025       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
       
  2026       \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
       
  2027       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
       
  2028     \endgroup
       
  2029     %
       
  2030     % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
       
  2031     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
       
  2032     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
       
  2033     %
       
  2034     % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  (Unfortunately
       
  2035     % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
       
  2036     % \baselineskip glue.)  However, if what follows is an environment
       
  2037     % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then
       
  2038     % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to
       
  2039     % crash together.  So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal
       
  2040     % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.
       
  2041     % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
       
  2042     % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
       
  2043     % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
       
  2044     % penalty 10001...)
       
  2045     \penalty 10001
       
  2046     \endgroup
       
  2047     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
       
  2048   \else
       
  2049     % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
       
  2050     % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
       
  2051     \noindent
       
  2052     % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
       
  2053     % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
       
  2054     % eventually be printed.
       
  2055     \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
       
  2056     \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
       
  2057     \unhbox0
       
  2058     \nobreak\kern\dimen0
       
  2059     \endgroup
       
  2060     \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
       
  2061   \fi
       
  2062 }
       
  2063 
       
  2064 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
       
  2065 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
       
  2066 \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
       
  2067 \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
       
  2068 \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
       
  2069 \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
       
  2070 
       
  2071 % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
       
  2072 \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
       
  2073 
       
  2074 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
       
  2075 \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
       
  2076 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
       
  2077 \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
       
  2078 \tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
       
  2079 
       
  2080 \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
       
  2081 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
       
  2082 \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
       
  2083 \tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
       
  2084 \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
       
  2085 \let\Etable=\relax}}
       
  2086 
       
  2087 \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
       
  2088 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
       
  2089 \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
       
  2090 \tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
       
  2091 \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
       
  2092 \let\Etable=\relax}}
       
  2093 
       
  2094 \def\dontindex #1{}
       
  2095 \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
       
  2096 \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
       
  2097 
       
  2098 {\obeyspaces %
       
  2099 \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
       
  2100 \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
       
  2101 
       
  2102 \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
       
  2103 \aboveenvbreak %
       
  2104 \begingroup %
       
  2105 \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
       
  2106 \let\itemindex=#1%
       
  2107 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
       
  2108 \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
       
  2109 \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
       
  2110 \def\itemfont{#2}%
       
  2111 \itemmax=\tableindent %
       
  2112 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
       
  2113 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
       
  2114 \exdentamount=\tableindent
       
  2115 \parindent = 0pt
       
  2116 \parskip = \smallskipamount
       
  2117 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
       
  2118 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
       
  2119 \let\item = \internalBitem %
       
  2120 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
       
  2121 \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
       
  2122 \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
       
  2123 \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
       
  2124 \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
       
  2125 }
       
  2126 
       
  2127 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
       
  2128 
       
  2129 \newcount \itemno
       
  2130 
       
  2131 \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
       
  2132 
       
  2133 \def\itemizezzz #1{%
       
  2134   \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
       
  2135   \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
       
  2136 }
       
  2137 
       
  2138 \def\itemizey#1#2{%
       
  2139   \aboveenvbreak
       
  2140   \itemmax=\itemindent
       
  2141   \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
       
  2142   \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
       
  2143   \exdentamount=\itemindent
       
  2144   \parindent=0pt
       
  2145   \parskip=\smallskipamount
       
  2146   \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
       
  2147   \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
       
  2148   \def\itemcontents{#1}%
       
  2149   % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
       
  2150   \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
       
  2151   \let\item=\itemizeitem
       
  2152 }
       
  2153 
       
  2154 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
       
  2155 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
       
  2156 %
       
  2157 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
       
  2158 
       
  2159 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
       
  2160 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
       
  2161 % argument is the same as `1'.
       
  2162 %
       
  2163 \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
       
  2164 \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
       
  2165 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
       
  2166   \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
       
  2167   %
       
  2168   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
       
  2169   \def\thearg{#1}%
       
  2170   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
       
  2171   %
       
  2172   % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
       
  2173   % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
       
  2174   % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
       
  2175   % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
       
  2176   % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
       
  2177   \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
       
  2178   \ifx\rest\empty
       
  2179     % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
       
  2180     % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
       
  2181     % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
       
  2182     %   not equal to itself.
       
  2183     % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
       
  2184     %
       
  2185     % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
       
  2186     % continuing to look for a <number>.
       
  2187     %
       
  2188     \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
       
  2189       \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
       
  2190     \else
       
  2191       % It's a letter.
       
  2192       \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
       
  2193         \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
       
  2194       \else
       
  2195         \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
       
  2196       \fi
       
  2197     \fi
       
  2198   \else
       
  2199     % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
       
  2200     \numericenumerate
       
  2201   \fi
       
  2202 }
       
  2203 
       
  2204 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
       
  2205 % given in \thearg.
       
  2206 %
       
  2207 \def\numericenumerate{%
       
  2208   \itemno = \thearg
       
  2209   \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
       
  2210 }
       
  2211 
       
  2212 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
       
  2213 \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
       
  2214   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
       
  2215   \startenumeration{%
       
  2216     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
       
  2217     \ifnum\itemno=0
       
  2218       \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
       
  2219                   alphabet}%
       
  2220     \fi
       
  2221     \char\lccode\itemno
       
  2222   }%
       
  2223 }
       
  2224 
       
  2225 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
       
  2226 \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
       
  2227   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
       
  2228   \startenumeration{%
       
  2229     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
       
  2230     \ifnum\itemno=0
       
  2231       \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
       
  2232                   alphabet}
       
  2233     \fi
       
  2234     \char\uccode\itemno
       
  2235   }%
       
  2236 }
       
  2237 
       
  2238 % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
       
  2239 % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
       
  2240 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
       
  2241 %
       
  2242 \def\startenumeration#1{%
       
  2243   \advance\itemno by -1
       
  2244   \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
       
  2245 }
       
  2246 
       
  2247 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
       
  2248 % to @enumerate.
       
  2249 %
       
  2250 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
       
  2251 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
       
  2252 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
       
  2253 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
       
  2254 
       
  2255 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
       
  2256 
       
  2257 \def\itemizeitem{%
       
  2258 \advance\itemno by 1
       
  2259 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
       
  2260 \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
       
  2261 {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
       
  2262 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
       
  2263 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
       
  2264 \flushcr}
       
  2265 
       
  2266 % @multitable macros
       
  2267 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
       
  2268 %
       
  2269 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
       
  2270 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
       
  2271 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
       
  2272 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
       
  2273 
       
  2274 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
       
  2275 
       
  2276 % To make preamble:
       
  2277 %
       
  2278 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
       
  2279 %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
       
  2280 %   @item ...
       
  2281 %
       
  2282 %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
       
  2283 %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
       
  2284 %   columns as desired.
       
  2285 
       
  2286 
       
  2287 % Or use a template:
       
  2288 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
       
  2289 %   @item ...
       
  2290 %   using the widest term desired in each column.
       
  2291 %
       
  2292 % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
       
  2293 % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
       
  2294 % will parse correctly, i.e.,
       
  2295 %
       
  2296 %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
       
  2297 %      template}
       
  2298 % Not:
       
  2299 %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
       
  2300 %      {Column 3 template}
       
  2301 
       
  2302 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
       
  2303 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
       
  2304 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
       
  2305 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
       
  2306 
       
  2307 % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
       
  2308 % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
       
  2309 
       
  2310 % Sample multitable:
       
  2311 
       
  2312 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
       
  2313 %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
       
  2314 %   @item
       
  2315 %   first col stuff
       
  2316 %   @tab
       
  2317 %   second col stuff
       
  2318 %   @tab
       
  2319 %   third col
       
  2320 %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
       
  2321 %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
       
  2322 %
       
  2323 %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
       
  2324 %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
       
  2325 %   @end multitable
       
  2326 
       
  2327 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
       
  2328 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
       
  2329 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
       
  2330 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
       
  2331 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
       
  2332 %                                                            to baseline.
       
  2333 %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
       
  2334 %
       
  2335 \newskip\multitableparskip
       
  2336 \newskip\multitableparindent
       
  2337 \newdimen\multitablecolspace
       
  2338 \newskip\multitablelinespace
       
  2339 \multitableparskip=0pt
       
  2340 \multitableparindent=6pt
       
  2341 \multitablecolspace=12pt
       
  2342 \multitablelinespace=0pt
       
  2343 
       
  2344 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
       
  2345 %
       
  2346 \let\endsetuptable\relax
       
  2347 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
       
  2348 \let\columnfractions\relax
       
  2349 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
       
  2350 \newif\ifsetpercent
       
  2351 
       
  2352 % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
       
  2353 % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
       
  2354 % just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
       
  2355 % percent of \hsize for this column.
       
  2356 \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
       
  2357   \global\advance\colcount by 1
       
  2358   \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
       
  2359   \setuptable
       
  2360 }
       
  2361 
       
  2362 \newcount\colcount
       
  2363 \def\setuptable#1{%
       
  2364   \def\firstarg{#1}%
       
  2365   \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
       
  2366     \let\go = \relax
       
  2367   \else
       
  2368     \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
       
  2369       \global\setpercenttrue
       
  2370     \else
       
  2371       \ifsetpercent
       
  2372          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
       
  2373       \else
       
  2374          \global\advance\colcount by 1
       
  2375          \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
       
  2376                    % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
       
  2377          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
       
  2378       \fi
       
  2379     \fi
       
  2380     \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
       
  2381       % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
       
  2382       % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
       
  2383       \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
       
  2384     \else
       
  2385       \let\go = \setuptable
       
  2386     \fi%
       
  2387   \fi
       
  2388   \go
       
  2389 }
       
  2390 
       
  2391 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
       
  2392 %
       
  2393 \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
       
  2394 \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
       
  2395   \vskip\parskip
       
  2396   \let\item=\crcrwithfootnotes
       
  2397   % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
       
  2398   % line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until
       
  2399   % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.  --karl,
       
  2400   % nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
       
  2401   \let\tab=&%
       
  2402   \let\startfootins=\startsavedfootnote
       
  2403   \tolerance=9500
       
  2404   \hbadness=9500
       
  2405   \setmultitablespacing
       
  2406   \parskip=\multitableparskip
       
  2407   \parindent=\multitableparindent
       
  2408   \overfullrule=0pt
       
  2409   \global\colcount=0
       
  2410   \def\Emultitable{%
       
  2411     \global\setpercentfalse
       
  2412     \crcrwithfootnotes\crcr
       
  2413     \egroup\egroup
       
  2414   }%
       
  2415   %
       
  2416   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
       
  2417   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
       
  2418   %
       
  2419   % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
       
  2420   % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
       
  2421   % The table preamble
       
  2422   % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
       
  2423   \everycr{\noalign{%
       
  2424   %
       
  2425   % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
       
  2426   % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
       
  2427   % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
       
  2428   % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
       
  2429     \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
       
  2430   %
       
  2431   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
       
  2432   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
       
  2433   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
       
  2434   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
       
  2435   \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
       
  2436     \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
       
  2437   %
       
  2438   % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
       
  2439   % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
       
  2440   % the first one.
       
  2441   %
       
  2442   % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
       
  2443   % to the width of each template entry.
       
  2444   %
       
  2445   % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
       
  2446   % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
       
  2447   % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
       
  2448   % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
       
  2449   %
       
  2450   % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
       
  2451   \rightskip=0pt
       
  2452   \ifnum\colcount=1
       
  2453     % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
       
  2454     \advance\hsize by\leftskip
       
  2455   \else
       
  2456     \ifsetpercent \else
       
  2457       % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
       
  2458       % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
       
  2459       \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
       
  2460     \fi
       
  2461    % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
       
  2462   \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
       
  2463   \fi
       
  2464   % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
       
  2465   % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
       
  2466   % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
       
  2467   % For example:
       
  2468   % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
       
  2469   % @item @code{#}
       
  2470   % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
       
  2471   % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
       
  2472   % characters.
       
  2473   \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
       
  2474 }
       
  2475 
       
  2476 \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
       
  2477 % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
       
  2478 % current baselineskip.
       
  2479 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
       
  2480 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
       
  2481 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
       
  2482 %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
       
  2483 %% to keep lines equally spaced
       
  2484 \let\multistrut = \strut
       
  2485 \else
       
  2486 %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
       
  2487 \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
       
  2488 width0pt\relax} \fi
       
  2489 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
       
  2490 %% table. If not, do nothing.
       
  2491 %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
       
  2492 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
       
  2493 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
       
  2494 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
       
  2495                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
       
  2496 \fi%
       
  2497 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
       
  2498 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
       
  2499 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
       
  2500                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
       
  2501 \fi}
       
  2502 
       
  2503 % In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
       
  2504 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is
       
  2505 % finished.  Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the
       
  2506 % main vertical list.  --kasal, 22jan03.
       
  2507 %
       
  2508 \newbox\savedfootnotes
       
  2509 %
       
  2510 % \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call
       
  2511 % it instead of starting the insertion right away.
       
  2512 \def\startsavedfootnote{%
       
  2513   \global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup
       
  2514     \unvbox\savedfootnotes
       
  2515 }
       
  2516 \def\crcrwithfootnotes{%
       
  2517   \crcr
       
  2518   \ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else
       
  2519     \noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}%
       
  2520   \fi
       
  2521 }
       
  2522 
       
  2523 \message{conditionals,}
       
  2524 % Prevent errors for section commands.
       
  2525 % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
       
  2526 \def\ignoresections{%
       
  2527   \let\appendix=\relax
       
  2528   \let\appendixsec=\relax
       
  2529   \let\appendixsection=\relax
       
  2530   \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
       
  2531   \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
       
  2532   \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
       
  2533   \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
       
  2534   %\let\begin=\relax
       
  2535   %\let\bye=\relax
       
  2536   \let\centerchap=\relax
       
  2537   \let\chapter=\relax
       
  2538   \let\contents=\relax
       
  2539   \let\section=\relax
       
  2540   \let\smallbook=\relax
       
  2541   \let\subsec=\relax
       
  2542   \let\subsection=\relax
       
  2543   \let\subsubsec=\relax
       
  2544   \let\subsubsection=\relax
       
  2545   \let\titlepage=\relax
       
  2546   \let\top=\relax
       
  2547   \let\unnumbered=\relax
       
  2548   \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
       
  2549   \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
       
  2550   \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
       
  2551   \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
       
  2552   \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
       
  2553   \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
       
  2554 }
       
  2555 
       
  2556 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
       
  2557 %
       
  2558 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
       
  2559 \def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
       
  2560 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
       
  2561 \def\html{\doignore{html}}
       
  2562 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
       
  2563 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
       
  2564 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
       
  2565 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
       
  2566 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
       
  2567 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
       
  2568 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
       
  2569 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
       
  2570 
       
  2571 % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
       
  2572 % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
       
  2573 \let\dircategory = \comment
       
  2574 
       
  2575 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
       
  2576 %
       
  2577 % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
       
  2578 \newcount\doignorecount  \doignorecount = 0
       
  2579 
       
  2580 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
       
  2581   % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
       
  2582   \ignoresections
       
  2583   %
       
  2584   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
       
  2585   \catcode\spaceChar = 10
       
  2586   %
       
  2587   % Ignore braces, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
       
  2588   \catcode`\{ = 9
       
  2589   \catcode`\} = 9
       
  2590   %
       
  2591   % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
       
  2592   \doignorecount = 0
       
  2593   %
       
  2594   % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
       
  2595   \expandafter \dodoignore \csname#1\endcsname {#1}%
       
  2596 }
       
  2597 
       
  2598 { \catcode`@=11 % We want to use \ST@P which cannot appear in texinfo source.
       
  2599   \obeylines %
       
  2600   %
       
  2601   \gdef\dodoignore#1#2{%
       
  2602     % #1 contains, e.g., \ifinfo, a.k.a. @ifinfo.
       
  2603     % #2 contains the string `ifinfo'.
       
  2604     %
       
  2605     % Define a command to find the next `@end #2', which must be on a line
       
  2606     % by itself.
       
  2607     \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M\end #2{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M#1\ST@P}%
       
  2608     % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
       
  2609     % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
       
  2610     % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
       
  2611     \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M#1##2\ST@P{\doignoreyyy{##2}\ST@P}%
       
  2612     %
       
  2613     % And now expand that command.
       
  2614     \obeylines %
       
  2615     \doignoretext ^^M%
       
  2616   }%
       
  2617 }
       
  2618 
       
  2619 \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
       
  2620   \def\temp{#1}%
       
  2621   \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
       
  2622     \let\next\doignoretextzzz
       
  2623   \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
       
  2624     \advance\doignorecount by 1
       
  2625     \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
       
  2626     % If we're here, #1 ends with \ifinfo (for example).
       
  2627   \fi
       
  2628   \next #1% the token \ST@P is present just after this macro.
       
  2629 }
       
  2630 
       
  2631 % We have to swallow the remaining "\ST@P".
       
  2632 % 
       
  2633 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
       
  2634   \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
       
  2635     \let\next\enddoignore
       
  2636   \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
       
  2637     \advance\doignorecount by -1
       
  2638     \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
       
  2639   \fi
       
  2640   \next
       
  2641 }
       
  2642 
       
  2643 % Finish off ignored text.
       
  2644 \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
       
  2645 
       
  2646 
       
  2647 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
       
  2648 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
       
  2649 %
       
  2650 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
       
  2651 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
       
  2652 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
       
  2653 % didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
       
  2654 % losing inside @example, for instance.
       
  2655 %
       
  2656 \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
       
  2657   \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
       
  2658   \parsearg\setxxx}
       
  2659 \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
       
  2660 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
       
  2661   \def\temp{#2}%
       
  2662   \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
       
  2663   \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
       
  2664   \fi
       
  2665   \endgroup
       
  2666 }
       
  2667 % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
       
  2668 % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
       
  2669 % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
       
  2670 \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
       
  2671 
       
  2672 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
       
  2673 %
       
  2674 \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
       
  2675 \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
       
  2676 
       
  2677 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
       
  2678 {
       
  2679   \catcode`\_ = \active
       
  2680   %
       
  2681   % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
       
  2682   % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
       
  2683   % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
       
  2684   \gdef\value{\begingroup
       
  2685     \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
       
  2686     \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
       
  2687     \valuexxx}
       
  2688 }
       
  2689 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
       
  2690 
       
  2691 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
       
  2692 % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
       
  2693 % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
       
  2694 % about that.  The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable
       
  2695 % is set), since the result winds up in the index file.  This means that
       
  2696 % if the variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost
       
  2697 % certain it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with
       
  2698 % sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of
       
  2699 % complete).
       
  2700 %
       
  2701 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
       
  2702   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
       
  2703     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
       
  2704     \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
       
  2705   \else
       
  2706     \csname SET#1\endcsname
       
  2707   \fi
       
  2708 }
       
  2709 
       
  2710 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
       
  2711 % with @set.
       
  2712 %
       
  2713 \def\ifset{\parsearg\doifset}
       
  2714 \def\doifset#1{%
       
  2715   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
       
  2716     \let\next=\ifsetfail
       
  2717   \else
       
  2718     \let\next=\ifsetsucceed
       
  2719   \fi
       
  2720   \next
       
  2721 }
       
  2722 \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
       
  2723 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
       
  2724 \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
       
  2725 
       
  2726 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
       
  2727 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
       
  2728 %
       
  2729 \def\ifclear{\parsearg\doifclear}
       
  2730 \def\doifclear#1{%
       
  2731   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
       
  2732     \let\next=\ifclearsucceed
       
  2733   \else
       
  2734     \let\next=\ifclearfail
       
  2735   \fi
       
  2736   \next
       
  2737 }
       
  2738 \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
       
  2739 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
       
  2740 \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
       
  2741 
       
  2742 % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
       
  2743 % read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make
       
  2744 % `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
       
  2745 %
       
  2746 \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
       
  2747 \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
       
  2748 \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
       
  2749 \def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
       
  2750 \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
       
  2751 \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
       
  2752 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
       
  2753 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
       
  2754 
       
  2755 % True conditional.  Since \set globally defines its variables, we can
       
  2756 % just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at
       
  2757 % the outer level).
       
  2758 %
       
  2759 \def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup
       
  2760   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}%
       
  2761 }
       
  2762 
       
  2763 % @defininfoenclose.
       
  2764 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
       
  2765 
       
  2766 
       
  2767 \message{indexing,}
       
  2768 % Index generation facilities
       
  2769 
       
  2770 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
       
  2771 % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
       
  2772 {\catcode`\@=11
       
  2773 \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
       
  2774 
       
  2775 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
       
  2776 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
       
  2777 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
       
  2778 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
       
  2779 % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
       
  2780 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
       
  2781 % for the sake of vms.
       
  2782 %
       
  2783 \def\newindex#1{%
       
  2784   \iflinks
       
  2785     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
       
  2786     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
       
  2787   \fi
       
  2788   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
       
  2789     \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
       
  2790 }
       
  2791 
       
  2792 % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
       
  2793 %
       
  2794 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
       
  2795 
       
  2796 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
       
  2797 %
       
  2798 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
       
  2799 %
       
  2800 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
       
  2801   \iflinks
       
  2802     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
       
  2803     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
       
  2804   \fi
       
  2805   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
       
  2806     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
       
  2807 }
       
  2808 
       
  2809 
       
  2810 % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
       
  2811 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
       
  2812 %
       
  2813 % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
       
  2814 % inside @code.
       
  2815 %
       
  2816 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
       
  2817 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
       
  2818 
       
  2819 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
       
  2820 % #3 the target index (bar).
       
  2821 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
       
  2822   % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
       
  2823   % closing the target index.
       
  2824   \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
       
  2825     % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
       
  2826     % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
       
  2827     \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
       
  2828     \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
       
  2829   \fi
       
  2830   % redefine \fooindfile:
       
  2831   \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
       
  2832   \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
       
  2833   % redefine \fooindex:
       
  2834   \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
       
  2835 }
       
  2836 
       
  2837 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
       
  2838 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
       
  2839 %  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
       
  2840 
       
  2841 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
       
  2842 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
       
  2843 
       
  2844 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
       
  2845 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
       
  2846 
       
  2847 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
       
  2848 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
       
  2849 
       
  2850 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
       
  2851 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
       
  2852 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
       
  2853 
       
  2854 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
       
  2855 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
       
  2856 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
       
  2857 %
       
  2858 \def\indexdummies{%
       
  2859   \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
       
  2860   \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
       
  2861   % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
       
  2862   % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
       
  2863   % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
       
  2864   \let\{ = \mylbrace
       
  2865   \let\} = \myrbrace
       
  2866   %
       
  2867   % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
       
  2868   % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control
       
  2869   % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
       
  2870   % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
       
  2871   % from whatever follows.
       
  2872   %
       
  2873   % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
       
  2874   % space.
       
  2875   %
       
  2876   % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
       
  2877   % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
       
  2878   % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
       
  2879   %
       
  2880   \def\definedummyword##1{%
       
  2881     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
       
  2882   }%
       
  2883   \def\definedummyletter##1{%
       
  2884     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
       
  2885   }%
       
  2886   %
       
  2887   % Do the redefinitions.
       
  2888   \commondummies
       
  2889 }
       
  2890 
       
  2891 % For the aux file, @ is the escape character.  So we want to redefine
       
  2892 % everything using @ instead of \realbackslash.  When everything uses
       
  2893 % @, this will be simpler.
       
  2894 %
       
  2895 \def\atdummies{%
       
  2896   \def\@{@@}%
       
  2897   \def\ {@ }%
       
  2898   \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
       
  2899   \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
       
  2900   %
       
  2901   % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
       
  2902   \def\definedummyword##1{%
       
  2903     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
       
  2904   }%
       
  2905   \def\definedummyletter##1{%
       
  2906     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
       
  2907   }%
       
  2908   %
       
  2909   % Do the redefinitions.
       
  2910   \commondummies
       
  2911 }
       
  2912 
       
  2913 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and
       
  2914 % \definedummyletter must be defined first.
       
  2915 %
       
  2916 \def\commondummies{%
       
  2917   %
       
  2918   \normalturnoffactive
       
  2919   %
       
  2920   % Control letters and accents.
       
  2921   \definedummyletter{_}%
       
  2922   \definedummyletter{,}%
       
  2923   \definedummyletter{"}%
       
  2924   \definedummyletter{`}%
       
  2925   \definedummyletter{'}%
       
  2926   \definedummyletter{^}%
       
  2927   \definedummyletter{~}%
       
  2928   \definedummyletter{=}%
       
  2929   \definedummyword{u}%
       
  2930   \definedummyword{v}%
       
  2931   \definedummyword{H}%
       
  2932   \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
       
  2933   \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
       
  2934   \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
       
  2935   \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
       
  2936   \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
       
  2937   \definedummyword{dotless}%
       
  2938   %
       
  2939   % Other non-English letters.
       
  2940   \definedummyword{AA}%
       
  2941   \definedummyword{AE}%
       
  2942   \definedummyword{L}%
       
  2943   \definedummyword{OE}%
       
  2944   \definedummyword{O}%
       
  2945   \definedummyword{aa}%
       
  2946   \definedummyword{ae}%
       
  2947   \definedummyword{l}%
       
  2948   \definedummyword{oe}%
       
  2949   \definedummyword{o}%
       
  2950   \definedummyword{ss}%
       
  2951   %
       
  2952   % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
       
  2953   \definedummyword{bf}%
       
  2954   \definedummyword{gtr}%
       
  2955   \definedummyword{hat}%
       
  2956   \definedummyword{less}%
       
  2957   \definedummyword{sf}%
       
  2958   \definedummyword{sl}%
       
  2959   \definedummyword{tclose}%
       
  2960   \definedummyword{tt}%
       
  2961   %
       
  2962   % Texinfo font commands.
       
  2963   \definedummyword{b}%
       
  2964   \definedummyword{i}%
       
  2965   \definedummyword{r}%
       
  2966   \definedummyword{sc}%
       
  2967   \definedummyword{t}%
       
  2968   %
       
  2969   \definedummyword{TeX}%
       
  2970   \definedummyword{acronym}%
       
  2971   \definedummyword{cite}%
       
  2972   \definedummyword{code}%
       
  2973   \definedummyword{command}%
       
  2974   \definedummyword{dfn}%
       
  2975   \definedummyword{dots}%
       
  2976   \definedummyword{emph}%
       
  2977   \definedummyword{env}%
       
  2978   \definedummyword{file}%
       
  2979   \definedummyword{kbd}%
       
  2980   \definedummyword{key}%
       
  2981   \definedummyword{math}%
       
  2982   \definedummyword{option}%
       
  2983   \definedummyword{samp}%
       
  2984   \definedummyword{strong}%
       
  2985   \definedummyword{uref}%
       
  2986   \definedummyword{url}%
       
  2987   \definedummyword{var}%
       
  2988   \definedummyword{w}%
       
  2989   %
       
  2990   % Assorted special characters.
       
  2991   \definedummyword{bullet}%
       
  2992   \definedummyword{copyright}%
       
  2993   \definedummyword{dots}%
       
  2994   \definedummyword{enddots}%
       
  2995   \definedummyword{equiv}%
       
  2996   \definedummyword{error}%
       
  2997   \definedummyword{expansion}%
       
  2998   \definedummyword{minus}%
       
  2999   \definedummyword{pounds}%
       
  3000   \definedummyword{point}%
       
  3001   \definedummyword{print}%
       
  3002   \definedummyword{result}%
       
  3003   %
       
  3004   % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
       
  3005   % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
       
  3006   % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
       
  3007   \let\value = \expandablevalue
       
  3008   %
       
  3009   % Normal spaces, not active ones.
       
  3010   \unsepspaces
       
  3011   %
       
  3012   % No macro expansion.
       
  3013   \turnoffmacros
       
  3014 }
       
  3015 
       
  3016 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
       
  3017 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
       
  3018 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
       
  3019 {\obeyspaces
       
  3020  \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
       
  3021 
       
  3022 
       
  3023 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
       
  3024 % by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
       
  3025 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
       
  3026 % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
       
  3027 %
       
  3028 \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
       
  3029 \def\indexdummydots{...}
       
  3030 %
       
  3031 \def\indexnofonts{%
       
  3032   \def\ { }%
       
  3033   \def\@{@}%
       
  3034   % how to handle braces?
       
  3035   \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
       
  3036   %
       
  3037   \let\,=\asis
       
  3038   \let\"=\asis
       
  3039   \let\`=\asis
       
  3040   \let\'=\asis
       
  3041   \let\^=\asis
       
  3042   \let\~=\asis
       
  3043   \let\==\asis
       
  3044   \let\u=\asis
       
  3045   \let\v=\asis
       
  3046   \let\H=\asis
       
  3047   \let\dotaccent=\asis
       
  3048   \let\ringaccent=\asis
       
  3049   \let\tieaccent=\asis
       
  3050   \let\ubaraccent=\asis
       
  3051   \let\udotaccent=\asis
       
  3052   \let\dotless=\asis
       
  3053   %
       
  3054   % Other non-English letters.
       
  3055   \def\AA{AA}%
       
  3056   \def\AE{AE}%
       
  3057   \def\L{L}%
       
  3058   \def\OE{OE}%
       
  3059   \def\O{O}%
       
  3060   \def\aa{aa}%
       
  3061   \def\ae{ae}%
       
  3062   \def\l{l}%
       
  3063   \def\oe{oe}%
       
  3064   \def\o{o}%
       
  3065   \def\ss{ss}%
       
  3066   \def\exclamdown{!}%
       
  3067   \def\questiondown{?}%
       
  3068   %
       
  3069   % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
       
  3070   % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
       
  3071   % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
       
  3072   %\let\tt=\asis
       
  3073   %
       
  3074   % Texinfo font commands.
       
  3075   \let\b=\asis
       
  3076   \let\i=\asis
       
  3077   \let\r=\asis
       
  3078   \let\sc=\asis
       
  3079   \let\t=\asis
       
  3080   %
       
  3081   \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
       
  3082   \let\acronym=\asis
       
  3083   \let\cite=\asis
       
  3084   \let\code=\asis
       
  3085   \let\command=\asis
       
  3086   \let\dfn=\asis
       
  3087   \let\dots=\indexdummydots
       
  3088   \let\emph=\asis
       
  3089   \let\env=\asis
       
  3090   \let\file=\asis
       
  3091   \let\kbd=\asis
       
  3092   \let\key=\asis
       
  3093   \let\math=\asis
       
  3094   \let\option=\asis
       
  3095   \let\samp=\asis
       
  3096   \let\strong=\asis
       
  3097   \let\uref=\asis
       
  3098   \let\url=\asis
       
  3099   \let\var=\asis
       
  3100   \let\w=\asis
       
  3101 }
       
  3102 
       
  3103 \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
       
  3104 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
       
  3105 
       
  3106 % For \ifx comparisons.
       
  3107 \def\emptymacro{\empty}
       
  3108 
       
  3109 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
       
  3110 %
       
  3111 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
       
  3112 
       
  3113 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
       
  3114 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
       
  3115 % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
       
  3116 % is with defuns, which call us directly.
       
  3117 %
       
  3118 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
       
  3119   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
       
  3120   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
       
  3121     \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
       
  3122   \fi
       
  3123   {%
       
  3124     \count255=\lastpenalty
       
  3125     {%
       
  3126       \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
       
  3127       \escapechar=`\\
       
  3128       {%
       
  3129         \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
       
  3130         \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
       
  3131         % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
       
  3132         %
       
  3133         % The main index entry text.
       
  3134         \toks0 = {#2}%
       
  3135         %
       
  3136         % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
       
  3137         \def\thirdarg{#3}%
       
  3138         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
       
  3139            % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
       
  3140            % line to write.
       
  3141           \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
       
  3142         \fi
       
  3143         %
       
  3144         % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
       
  3145         % get the string to sort by.
       
  3146         {\indexnofonts
       
  3147          \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
       
  3148          \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
       
  3149         }%
       
  3150         %
       
  3151         % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
       
  3152         % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
       
  3153         % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
       
  3154         % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
       
  3155         % sorted result.
       
  3156         \edef\temp{%
       
  3157           \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
       
  3158             \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
       
  3159         }%
       
  3160         %
       
  3161         % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
       
  3162         % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
       
  3163         % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
       
  3164         % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
       
  3165         % like this:
       
  3166         % @end defun
       
  3167         % @tindex whatever
       
  3168         % @defun ...
       
  3169         % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
       
  3170         % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
       
  3171         % the previous defun.
       
  3172         %
       
  3173         % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
       
  3174         % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
       
  3175         %
       
  3176         % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
       
  3177         %
       
  3178         \iflinks
       
  3179           \ifvmode
       
  3180             \skip0 = \lastskip
       
  3181             \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\skip0 \fi
       
  3182           \fi
       
  3183           %
       
  3184           \temp % do the write
       
  3185           %
       
  3186           \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
       
  3187         \fi
       
  3188       }%
       
  3189     }%
       
  3190     \penalty\count255
       
  3191   }%
       
  3192 }
       
  3193 
       
  3194 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
       
  3195 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
       
  3196 % or
       
  3197 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
       
  3198 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
       
  3199 % containing these kinds of lines:
       
  3200 %  \initial {c}
       
  3201 %     before the first topic whose initial is c
       
  3202 %  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
       
  3203 %     for a topic that is used without subtopics
       
  3204 %  \primary {topic}
       
  3205 %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
       
  3206 %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
       
  3207 %     for each subtopic.
       
  3208 
       
  3209 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
       
  3210 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
       
  3211 
       
  3212 \def\findex {\fnindex}
       
  3213 \def\kindex {\kyindex}
       
  3214 \def\cindex {\cpindex}
       
  3215 \def\vindex {\vrindex}
       
  3216 \def\tindex {\tpindex}
       
  3217 \def\pindex {\pgindex}
       
  3218 
       
  3219 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
       
  3220 {\obeylines %
       
  3221 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
       
  3222 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
       
  3223 
       
  3224 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
       
  3225 
       
  3226 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
       
  3227 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
       
  3228 %
       
  3229 \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
       
  3230 \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
       
  3231   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
       
  3232   %
       
  3233   \smallfonts \rm
       
  3234   \tolerance = 9500
       
  3235   \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
       
  3236   \indexbreaks
       
  3237   %
       
  3238   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
       
  3239   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
       
  3240   % \initial {@}
       
  3241   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
       
  3242   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
       
  3243   \catcode`\@ = 11
       
  3244   \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
       
  3245   \ifeof 1
       
  3246     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
       
  3247     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
       
  3248     % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
       
  3249     % there is some text.
       
  3250     \putwordIndexNonexistent
       
  3251   \else
       
  3252     %
       
  3253     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
       
  3254     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
       
  3255     % it can discover if there is anything in it.
       
  3256     \read 1 to \temp
       
  3257     \ifeof 1
       
  3258       \putwordIndexIsEmpty
       
  3259     \else
       
  3260       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
       
  3261       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
       
  3262       % to make right now.
       
  3263       \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
       
  3264       \catcode`\\ = 0
       
  3265       \escapechar = `\\
       
  3266       \begindoublecolumns
       
  3267       \input \jobname.#1s
       
  3268       \enddoublecolumns
       
  3269     \fi
       
  3270   \fi
       
  3271   \closein 1
       
  3272 \endgroup}
       
  3273 
       
  3274 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
       
  3275 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
       
  3276 
       
  3277 \def\initial#1{{%
       
  3278   % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
       
  3279   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
       
  3280   %
       
  3281   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
       
  3282   \removelastskip
       
  3283   %
       
  3284   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
       
  3285   \penalty -300
       
  3286   %
       
  3287   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
       
  3288   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
       
  3289   % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
       
  3290   % we need before each entry, but it's better.
       
  3291   %
       
  3292   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
       
  3293   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
       
  3294   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
       
  3295   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
       
  3296   %
       
  3297   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
       
  3298   \nobreak
       
  3299 }}
       
  3300 
       
  3301 % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
       
  3302 % flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
       
  3303 % entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
       
  3304 %
       
  3305 \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
       
  3306   %
       
  3307   % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
       
  3308   % affect previous text.
       
  3309   \par
       
  3310   %
       
  3311   % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
       
  3312   \parfillskip = 0in
       
  3313   %
       
  3314   % No extra space above this paragraph.
       
  3315   \parskip = 0in
       
  3316   %
       
  3317   % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
       
  3318   \finalhyphendemerits = 0
       
  3319   %
       
  3320   % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
       
  3321   % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
       
  3322   % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
       
  3323   % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
       
  3324   % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
       
  3325   %
       
  3326   % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
       
  3327   % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
       
  3328   \hangindent = 2em
       
  3329   %
       
  3330   % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
       
  3331   % with blank space.
       
  3332   \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
       
  3333   %
       
  3334   % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
       
  3335   \vskip 0pt plus1pt
       
  3336   %
       
  3337   % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
       
  3338   % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
       
  3339   \noindent
       
  3340   %
       
  3341   % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
       
  3342   #1%
       
  3343   % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
       
  3344   % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
       
  3345   % cursed by a Unix daemon.
       
  3346   \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
       
  3347   \def\tempb{#2}%
       
  3348   \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
       
  3349   \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
       
  3350   \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
       
  3351     %
       
  3352     % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
       
  3353     % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
       
  3354     % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
       
  3355     \hfil\penalty50
       
  3356     \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
       
  3357     %
       
  3358     % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
       
  3359     % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
       
  3360     % \hbox ensues.
       
  3361     \ifpdf
       
  3362       \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
       
  3363     \else
       
  3364       \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
       
  3365     \fi
       
  3366   \fi%
       
  3367   \par
       
  3368 \endgroup}
       
  3369 
       
  3370 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
       
  3371 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
       
  3372   \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
       
  3373 
       
  3374 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
       
  3375 
       
  3376 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
       
  3377 \def\secondary#1#2{{%
       
  3378   \parfillskip=0in
       
  3379   \parskip=0in
       
  3380   \hangindent=1in
       
  3381   \hangafter=1
       
  3382   \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
       
  3383   \ifpdf
       
  3384     \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
       
  3385   \else
       
  3386     #2
       
  3387   \fi
       
  3388   \par
       
  3389 }}
       
  3390 
       
  3391 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
       
  3392 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
       
  3393 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
       
  3394 \catcode`\@=11
       
  3395 
       
  3396 \newbox\partialpage
       
  3397 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
       
  3398 
       
  3399 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
       
  3400   % Grab any single-column material above us.
       
  3401   \output = {%
       
  3402     %
       
  3403     % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
       
  3404     % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
       
  3405     % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
       
  3406     % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
       
  3407     % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
       
  3408     % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
       
  3409     % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
       
  3410     \ifvoid\partialpage \else
       
  3411       \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
       
  3412     \fi
       
  3413     %
       
  3414     \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
       
  3415       % Unvbox the main output page.
       
  3416       \unvbox\PAGE
       
  3417       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
       
  3418     }%
       
  3419   }%
       
  3420   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
       
  3421   %
       
  3422   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
       
  3423   \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
       
  3424   %
       
  3425   % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
       
  3426   % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
       
  3427   % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
       
  3428   % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
       
  3429   % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
       
  3430   %
       
  3431   % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
       
  3432   % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
       
  3433   % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
       
  3434   % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
       
  3435   % as it did when we hard-coded it.
       
  3436   %
       
  3437   % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
       
  3438   % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
       
  3439   % been clobbered.
       
  3440   %
       
  3441   \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
       
  3442     \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
       
  3443     \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
       
  3444   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
       
  3445   %
       
  3446   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
       
  3447   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
       
  3448   \vsize = 2\vsize
       
  3449 }
       
  3450 
       
  3451 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
       
  3452 % the last.
       
  3453 %
       
  3454 \def\doublecolumnout{%
       
  3455   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
       
  3456   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
       
  3457   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
       
  3458   % previous page.
       
  3459   \dimen@ = \vsize
       
  3460   \divide\dimen@ by 2
       
  3461   \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
       
  3462   %
       
  3463   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
       
  3464   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
       
  3465   \onepageout\pagesofar
       
  3466   \unvbox255
       
  3467   \penalty\outputpenalty
       
  3468 }
       
  3469 %
       
  3470 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
       
  3471 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
       
  3472 \def\pagesofar{%
       
  3473   \unvbox\partialpage
       
  3474   %
       
  3475   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
       
  3476   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
       
  3477   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
       
  3478 }
       
  3479 %
       
  3480 % All done with double columns.
       
  3481 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
       
  3482   \output = {%
       
  3483     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
       
  3484     % current page, no automatic page break.
       
  3485     \balancecolumns
       
  3486     %
       
  3487     % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
       
  3488     % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
       
  3489     % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
       
  3490     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
       
  3491     % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
       
  3492     % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
       
  3493     % the output somewhat more palatable.)
       
  3494     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
       
  3495   }%
       
  3496   \eject
       
  3497   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
       
  3498   %
       
  3499   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
       
  3500   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
       
  3501   % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
       
  3502   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
       
  3503   \pagegoal = \vsize
       
  3504 }
       
  3505 %
       
  3506 % Called at the end of the double column material.
       
  3507 \def\balancecolumns{%
       
  3508   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
       
  3509   \dimen@ = \ht0
       
  3510   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
       
  3511   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
       
  3512   \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
       
  3513   %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
       
  3514   \splittopskip = \topskip
       
  3515   % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
       
  3516   {%
       
  3517     \vbadness = 10000
       
  3518     \loop
       
  3519       \global\setbox3 = \copy0
       
  3520       \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
       
  3521     \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
       
  3522       \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
       
  3523     \repeat
       
  3524   }%
       
  3525   %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
       
  3526   \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
       
  3527   \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
       
  3528   %
       
  3529   \pagesofar
       
  3530 }
       
  3531 \catcode`\@ = \other
       
  3532 
       
  3533 
       
  3534 \message{sectioning,}
       
  3535 % Chapters, sections, etc.
       
  3536 
       
  3537 \newcount\chapno
       
  3538 \newcount\secno        \secno=0
       
  3539 \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
       
  3540 \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
       
  3541 
       
  3542 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
       
  3543 \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
       
  3544 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
       
  3545 % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
       
  3546 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
       
  3547 \def\appendixletter{%
       
  3548   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
       
  3549   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
       
  3550   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
       
  3551   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
       
  3552   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
       
  3553   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
       
  3554   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
       
  3555   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
       
  3556   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
       
  3557   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
       
  3558   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
       
  3559   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
       
  3560   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
       
  3561   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
       
  3562   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
       
  3563   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
       
  3564   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
       
  3565   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
       
  3566   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
       
  3567   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
       
  3568   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
       
  3569   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
       
  3570   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
       
  3571   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
       
  3572   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
       
  3573   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
       
  3574   % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
       
  3575   % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
       
  3576   % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
       
  3577   % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
       
  3578   \else\char\the\appendixno
       
  3579   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
       
  3580   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
       
  3581 
       
  3582 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
       
  3583 % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
       
  3584 \def\thischapter{}
       
  3585 \def\thissection{}
       
  3586 
       
  3587 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
       
  3588 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
       
  3589 
       
  3590 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
       
  3591 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
       
  3592 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
       
  3593 
       
  3594 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
       
  3595 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
       
  3596 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
       
  3597 
       
  3598 % Choose a numbered-heading macro
       
  3599 % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
       
  3600 % #2 is text for heading
       
  3601 \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
       
  3602 \ifcase\absseclevel
       
  3603   \chapterzzz{#2}
       
  3604 \or
       
  3605   \seczzz{#2}
       
  3606 \or
       
  3607   \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3608 \or
       
  3609   \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3610 \else
       
  3611   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
       
  3612     \chapterzzz{#2}
       
  3613   \else
       
  3614     \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3615   \fi
       
  3616 \fi
       
  3617 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
       
  3618 }
       
  3619 
       
  3620 % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
       
  3621 \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
       
  3622 \ifcase\absseclevel
       
  3623   \appendixzzz{#2}
       
  3624 \or
       
  3625   \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
       
  3626 \or
       
  3627   \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3628 \or
       
  3629   \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3630 \else
       
  3631   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
       
  3632     \appendixzzz{#2}
       
  3633   \else
       
  3634     \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3635   \fi
       
  3636 \fi
       
  3637 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
       
  3638 }
       
  3639 
       
  3640 % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
       
  3641 \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
       
  3642 \ifcase\absseclevel
       
  3643   \unnumberedzzz{#2}
       
  3644 \or
       
  3645   \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
       
  3646 \or
       
  3647   \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3648 \or
       
  3649   \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3650 \else
       
  3651   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
       
  3652     \unnumberedzzz{#2}
       
  3653   \else
       
  3654     \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
       
  3655   \fi
       
  3656 \fi
       
  3657 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
       
  3658 }
       
  3659 
       
  3660 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
       
  3661 \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
       
  3662 \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
       
  3663 \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
       
  3664 \def\chapterzzz #1{%
       
  3665   \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
       
  3666   \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
       
  3667   \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
       
  3668   \gdef\thissection{#1}%
       
  3669   \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
       
  3670   % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
       
  3671   % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
       
  3672   \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
       
  3673   \writetocentry{chap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
       
  3674   \donoderef
       
  3675   \global\let\section = \numberedsec
       
  3676   \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
       
  3677   \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
       
  3678 }
       
  3679 
       
  3680 % we use \chapno to avoid indenting back
       
  3681 \def\appendixbox#1{%
       
  3682   \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} \the\chapno}%
       
  3683   \hbox to \wd0{#1\hss}}
       
  3684 
       
  3685 \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
       
  3686 \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
       
  3687 \def\appendixzzz #1{%
       
  3688   \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
       
  3689   \global\advance \appendixno by 1
       
  3690   \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
       
  3691   \chapmacro {#1}{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}%
       
  3692   \gdef\thissection{#1}%
       
  3693   \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
       
  3694   \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
       
  3695   \writetocentry{appendix}{#1}{{\appendixletter}}
       
  3696   \appendixnoderef
       
  3697   \global\let\section = \appendixsec
       
  3698   \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
       
  3699   \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
       
  3700 }
       
  3701 
       
  3702 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
       
  3703 \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
       
  3704 \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
       
  3705 
       
  3706 % @top is like @unnumbered.
       
  3707 \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
       
  3708 
       
  3709 \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
       
  3710 \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
       
  3711 \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
       
  3712   \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
       
  3713   %
       
  3714   % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
       
  3715   % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
       
  3716   % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
       
  3717   % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
       
  3718   % to be executed, not expanded).
       
  3719   %
       
  3720   % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
       
  3721   % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
       
  3722   % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
       
  3723   % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
       
  3724   % the toc entries.)
       
  3725   \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
       
  3726   %
       
  3727   \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
       
  3728   \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
       
  3729   \writetocentry{unnumbchap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
       
  3730   \unnumbnoderef
       
  3731   \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
       
  3732   \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
       
  3733   \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
       
  3734 }
       
  3735 
       
  3736 % Sections.
       
  3737 \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
       
  3738 \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
       
  3739 \def\seczzz #1{%
       
  3740   \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
       
  3741   \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
       
  3742   \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
       
  3743   \donoderef
       
  3744   \nobreak
       
  3745 }
       
  3746 
       
  3747 \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
       
  3748 \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
       
  3749 \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
       
  3750 \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
       
  3751   \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
       
  3752   \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
       
  3753   \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}
       
  3754   \appendixnoderef
       
  3755   \nobreak
       
  3756 }
       
  3757 
       
  3758 \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
       
  3759 \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
       
  3760 \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
       
  3761   \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
       
  3762   \writetocentry{unnumbsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
       
  3763   \unnumbnoderef
       
  3764   \nobreak
       
  3765 }
       
  3766 
       
  3767 % Subsections.
       
  3768 \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
       
  3769 \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
       
  3770 \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
       
  3771   \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
       
  3772   \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
       
  3773   \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
       
  3774   \donoderef
       
  3775   \nobreak
       
  3776 }
       
  3777 
       
  3778 \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
       
  3779 \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
       
  3780 \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
       
  3781   \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
       
  3782   \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
       
  3783   \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
       
  3784   \appendixnoderef
       
  3785   \nobreak
       
  3786 }
       
  3787 
       
  3788 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
       
  3789 \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
       
  3790 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
       
  3791   \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
       
  3792   \writetocentry{unnumbsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
       
  3793   \unnumbnoderef
       
  3794   \nobreak
       
  3795 }
       
  3796 
       
  3797 % Subsubsections.
       
  3798 \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
       
  3799 \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
       
  3800 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
       
  3801   \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
       
  3802   \subsubsecheading {#1}
       
  3803     {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
       
  3804   \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
       
  3805   \donoderef
       
  3806   \nobreak
       
  3807 }
       
  3808 
       
  3809 \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
       
  3810 \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
       
  3811 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
       
  3812   \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
       
  3813   \subsubsecheading {#1}
       
  3814     {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
       
  3815   \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
       
  3816   \appendixnoderef
       
  3817   \nobreak
       
  3818 }
       
  3819 
       
  3820 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
       
  3821 \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
       
  3822 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
       
  3823   \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
       
  3824   \writetocentry{unnumbsubsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
       
  3825   \unnumbnoderef
       
  3826   \nobreak
       
  3827 }
       
  3828 
       
  3829 % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
       
  3830 % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
       
  3831 \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
       
  3832 \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
       
  3833 \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
       
  3834 \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
       
  3835 \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
       
  3836 
       
  3837 \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
       
  3838 \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
       
  3839 \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
       
  3840 \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
       
  3841 
       
  3842 \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
       
  3843 \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
       
  3844 \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
       
  3845 \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
       
  3846 
       
  3847 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
       
  3848 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
       
  3849 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
       
  3850 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
       
  3851 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
       
  3852 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
       
  3853 
       
  3854 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
       
  3855 
       
  3856 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
       
  3857 %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
       
  3858 %          overlong headings to fold.
       
  3859 %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
       
  3860 %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
       
  3861 %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
       
  3862 %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
       
  3863 
       
  3864 
       
  3865 \def\majorheading{%
       
  3866   {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
       
  3867   \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
       
  3868 }
       
  3869 
       
  3870 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
       
  3871 \def\chapheadingzzz #1{%
       
  3872   {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
       
  3873                     \parindent=0pt\raggedright
       
  3874                     \rm #1\hfill}}%
       
  3875   \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
       
  3876   \suppressfirstparagraphindent
       
  3877 }
       
  3878 
       
  3879 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
       
  3880 \def\heading{\parsearg\doheading}
       
  3881 \def\subheading{\parsearg\dosubheading}
       
  3882 \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\dosubsubheading}
       
  3883 \def\doheading#1{\plainsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
       
  3884 \def\dosubheading#1{\plainsubsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
       
  3885 \def\dosubsubheading#1{\plainsubsubsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
       
  3886 
       
  3887 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
       
  3888 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
       
  3889 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
       
  3890 
       
  3891 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
       
  3892 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
       
  3893 
       
  3894 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
       
  3895 
       
  3896 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
       
  3897 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
       
  3898 
       
  3899 \newskip\chapheadingskip
       
  3900 
       
  3901 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
       
  3902 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
       
  3903 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
       
  3904 
       
  3905 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
       
  3906 
       
  3907 \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
       
  3908 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
       
  3909 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
       
  3910 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
       
  3911 
       
  3912 \def\CHAPPAGon{%
       
  3913 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
       
  3914 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
       
  3915 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
       
  3916 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
       
  3917 
       
  3918 \def\CHAPPAGodd{
       
  3919 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
       
  3920 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
       
  3921 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
       
  3922 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
       
  3923 
       
  3924 \CHAPPAGon
       
  3925 
       
  3926 \def\CHAPFplain{
       
  3927 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
       
  3928 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
       
  3929 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
       
  3930 
       
  3931 % Plain chapter opening.
       
  3932 % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
       
  3933 \def\chfplain#1#2{%
       
  3934   \pchapsepmacro
       
  3935   {%
       
  3936     \chapfonts \rm
       
  3937     \def\chapnum{#2}%
       
  3938     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
       
  3939     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
       
  3940           \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
       
  3941           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
       
  3942   }%
       
  3943   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
       
  3944   \nobreak
       
  3945 }
       
  3946 
       
  3947 % Plain opening for unnumbered.
       
  3948 \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
       
  3949 
       
  3950 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
       
  3951 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
       
  3952 \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
       
  3953   \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
       
  3954     \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
       
  3955     \leftskip = \rightskip
       
  3956     \parfillskip = 0pt
       
  3957   }%
       
  3958   \chfplain{#1}{}%
       
  3959 }}
       
  3960 
       
  3961 \CHAPFplain % The default
       
  3962 
       
  3963 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
       
  3964 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
       
  3965                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright
       
  3966                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
       
  3967 }
       
  3968 
       
  3969 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
       
  3970 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
       
  3971 \par\penalty 5000 %
       
  3972 }
       
  3973 
       
  3974 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
       
  3975 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
       
  3976                        \parindent=0pt
       
  3977                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
       
  3978 }
       
  3979 
       
  3980 \def\CHAPFopen{
       
  3981 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
       
  3982 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
       
  3983 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
       
  3984 
       
  3985 
       
  3986 % Section titles.
       
  3987 \newskip\secheadingskip
       
  3988 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
       
  3989 \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
       
  3990 \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
       
  3991 
       
  3992 % Subsection titles.
       
  3993 \newskip \subsecheadingskip
       
  3994 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
       
  3995 \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
       
  3996 \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
       
  3997 
       
  3998 % Subsubsection titles.
       
  3999 \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
       
  4000 \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
       
  4001 \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
       
  4002 \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
       
  4003 
       
  4004 
       
  4005 % Print any size section title.
       
  4006 %
       
  4007 % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
       
  4008 % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
       
  4009 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
       
  4010   {%
       
  4011     \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
       
  4012     \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
       
  4013   }%
       
  4014   {%
       
  4015     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
       
  4016     \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
       
  4017     %
       
  4018     % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
       
  4019     \def\secnum{#2}%
       
  4020     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
       
  4021     %
       
  4022     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
       
  4023           \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
       
  4024           \unhbox0 #3}%
       
  4025   }%
       
  4026   % Add extra space after the heading -- either a line space or a
       
  4027   % paragraph space, whichever is more.  (Some people like to set
       
  4028   % \parskip to large values for some reason.)  Don't allow stretch, though.
       
  4029   \nobreak
       
  4030   \ifdim\parskip>\normalbaselineskip
       
  4031     \kern\parskip
       
  4032   \else
       
  4033     \kern\normalbaselineskip
       
  4034   \fi
       
  4035   \nobreak
       
  4036 }
       
  4037 
       
  4038 
       
  4039 \message{toc,}
       
  4040 % Table of contents.
       
  4041 \newwrite\tocfile
       
  4042 
       
  4043 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
       
  4044 % Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
       
  4045 % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
       
  4046 %
       
  4047 % Usage: \writetocentry{chap}{The Name of The Game}{{\the\chapno}}
       
  4048 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
       
  4049 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
       
  4050 %
       
  4051 \newif\iftocfileopened
       
  4052 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
       
  4053   \iftocfileopened\else
       
  4054     \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
       
  4055     \global\tocfileopenedtrue
       
  4056   \fi
       
  4057   %
       
  4058   \iflinks
       
  4059     \toks0 = {#2}%
       
  4060     \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}#3{\folio}}}%
       
  4061     \temp
       
  4062   \fi
       
  4063   %
       
  4064   % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
       
  4065   % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't
       
  4066   % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
       
  4067   % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
       
  4068   % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
       
  4069   % two named `2'.
       
  4070   \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
       
  4071 }
       
  4072 
       
  4073 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
       
  4074 \newcount\savepageno
       
  4075 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
       
  4076 
       
  4077 % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
       
  4078 % to \tocfile.
       
  4079 %
       
  4080 \def\startcontents#1{%
       
  4081    % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
       
  4082    % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
       
  4083    % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
       
  4084    % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
       
  4085    \contentsalignmacro
       
  4086    \immediate\closeout\tocfile
       
  4087    %
       
  4088    % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
       
  4089    % It is abundantly clear what they are.
       
  4090    \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
       
  4091    \savepageno = \pageno
       
  4092    \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
       
  4093       \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
       
  4094       % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
       
  4095       % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
       
  4096       %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
       
  4097       \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
       
  4098       \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
       
  4099       %
       
  4100       % Roman numerals for page numbers.
       
  4101       \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
       
  4102 }
       
  4103 
       
  4104 
       
  4105 % Normal (long) toc.
       
  4106 \def\contents{%
       
  4107    \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
       
  4108      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
       
  4109      \ifeof 1 \else
       
  4110        \closein 1
       
  4111        \input \jobname.toc
       
  4112      \fi
       
  4113      \vfill \eject
       
  4114      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
       
  4115      \pdfmakeoutlines
       
  4116    \endgroup
       
  4117    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
       
  4118    \global\pageno = \savepageno
       
  4119 }
       
  4120 
       
  4121 % And just the chapters.
       
  4122 \def\summarycontents{%
       
  4123    \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
       
  4124       %
       
  4125       \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
       
  4126       \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
       
  4127       \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
       
  4128       % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
       
  4129       \secfonts
       
  4130       \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
       
  4131       \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
       
  4132       \rm
       
  4133       \hyphenpenalty = 10000
       
  4134       \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
       
  4135       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
       
  4136       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
       
  4137       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
       
  4138       \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
       
  4139       \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
       
  4140       \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
       
  4141       \openin 1 \jobname.toc
       
  4142       \ifeof 1 \else
       
  4143         \closein 1
       
  4144         \input \jobname.toc
       
  4145       \fi
       
  4146      \vfill \eject
       
  4147      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
       
  4148    \endgroup
       
  4149    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
       
  4150    \global\pageno = \savepageno
       
  4151 }
       
  4152 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
       
  4153 
       
  4154 \ifpdf
       
  4155   \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
       
  4156 \fi
       
  4157 
       
  4158 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
       
  4159 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
       
  4160 % The last argument is the page number.
       
  4161 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
       
  4162 
       
  4163 % Chapters, in the main contents.
       
  4164 \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
       
  4165 %
       
  4166 % Chapters, in the short toc.
       
  4167 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
       
  4168 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
       
  4169   \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
       
  4170 }
       
  4171 
       
  4172 % Appendices, in the main contents.
       
  4173 \def\appendixentry#1#2#3{%
       
  4174   \dochapentry{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} #2}\labelspace#1}{#3}}
       
  4175 %
       
  4176 % Appendices, in the short toc.
       
  4177 \let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
       
  4178 
       
  4179 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
       
  4180 % The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
       
  4181 % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
       
  4182 % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
       
  4183 % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
       
  4184 %
       
  4185 \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
       
  4186 %
       
  4187 \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
       
  4188   % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
       
  4189   % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
       
  4190   % But use \hss just in case.
       
  4191   % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
       
  4192   % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
       
  4193   \dimen0 = 1em
       
  4194   \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
       
  4195 }
       
  4196 
       
  4197 % Unnumbered chapters.
       
  4198 \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#1}{#3}}
       
  4199 \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2#3{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}}
       
  4200 
       
  4201 % Sections.
       
  4202 \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
       
  4203 \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
       
  4204 
       
  4205 % Subsections.
       
  4206 \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
       
  4207 \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
       
  4208 
       
  4209 % And subsubsections.
       
  4210 \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
       
  4211   \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
       
  4212 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#6}}
       
  4213 
       
  4214 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
       
  4215 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
       
  4216 
       
  4217 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
       
  4218 % page number.
       
  4219 %
       
  4220 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
       
  4221 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
       
  4222 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
       
  4223    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
       
  4224    \begingroup
       
  4225      \chapentryfonts
       
  4226      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
       
  4227    \endgroup
       
  4228    \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
       
  4229 }
       
  4230 
       
  4231 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
       
  4232   \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
       
  4233   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
       
  4234 \endgroup}
       
  4235 
       
  4236 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
       
  4237   \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
       
  4238   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
       
  4239 \endgroup}
       
  4240 
       
  4241 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
       
  4242   \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
       
  4243   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
       
  4244 \endgroup}
       
  4245 
       
  4246 % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
       
  4247 % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
       
  4248 % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
       
  4249 % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
       
  4250 \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
       
  4251   \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
       
  4252   % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
       
  4253   % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
       
  4254   % have to do the usual translation tricks.
       
  4255   \entry{#1}{#2}%
       
  4256 \endgroup}
       
  4257 
       
  4258 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
       
  4259 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
       
  4260 
       
  4261 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
       
  4262 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
       
  4263 
       
  4264 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
       
  4265 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
       
  4266 \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
       
  4267 \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
       
  4268 
       
  4269 
       
  4270 \message{environments,}
       
  4271 % @foo ... @end foo.
       
  4272 
       
  4273 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
       
  4274 %
       
  4275 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
       
  4276 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
       
  4277 %
       
  4278 \def\point{$\star$}
       
  4279 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
       
  4280 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
       
  4281 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
       
  4282 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
       
  4283 
       
  4284 % The @error{} command.
       
  4285 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
       
  4286 %
       
  4287 \newbox\errorbox
       
  4288 %
       
  4289 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
       
  4290 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
       
  4291 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
       
  4292 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
       
  4293 %
       
  4294 \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
       
  4295    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
       
  4296    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
       
  4297    \vbox{
       
  4298       \hrule height\dimen2
       
  4299       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
       
  4300          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
       
  4301          \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
       
  4302       \hrule height\dimen2}
       
  4303     \hfil}
       
  4304 %
       
  4305 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
       
  4306 
       
  4307 % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
       
  4308 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
       
  4309 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
       
  4310 
       
  4311 \def\tex{\begingroup
       
  4312   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
       
  4313   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
       
  4314   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
       
  4315   \catcode `\%=14
       
  4316   \catcode `\+=\other
       
  4317   \catcode `\"=\other
       
  4318   \catcode `\==\other
       
  4319   \catcode `\|=\other
       
  4320   \catcode `\<=\other
       
  4321   \catcode `\>=\other
       
  4322   \escapechar=`\\
       
  4323   %
       
  4324   \let\b=\ptexb
       
  4325   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
       
  4326   \let\c=\ptexc
       
  4327   \let\,=\ptexcomma
       
  4328   \let\.=\ptexdot
       
  4329   \let\dots=\ptexdots
       
  4330   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
       
  4331   \let\!=\ptexexclam
       
  4332   \let\i=\ptexi
       
  4333   \let\indent=\ptexindent
       
  4334   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
       
  4335   \let\+=\tabalign
       
  4336   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
       
  4337   \let\/=\ptexslash
       
  4338   \let\*=\ptexstar
       
  4339   \let\t=\ptext
       
  4340   %
       
  4341   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
       
  4342   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
       
  4343   \def\@{@}%
       
  4344 \let\Etex=\endgroup}
       
  4345 
       
  4346 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
       
  4347 % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
       
  4348 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
       
  4349 
       
  4350 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
       
  4351 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
       
  4352 
       
  4353 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
       
  4354 % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
       
  4355 % have any width.
       
  4356 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
       
  4357 
       
  4358 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
       
  4359 % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
       
  4360 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
       
  4361 % should produce a line of output anyway.
       
  4362 %
       
  4363 {\obeyspaces %
       
  4364 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
       
  4365 
       
  4366 % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
       
  4367 % for use in \parsearg.
       
  4368 {\sepspaces%
       
  4369 \global\let\obeyedspace= }
       
  4370 
       
  4371 % This space is always present above and below environments.
       
  4372 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
       
  4373 
       
  4374 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
       
  4375 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
       
  4376 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
       
  4377 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
       
  4378 %
       
  4379 \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
       
  4380   % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.
       
  4381   \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
       
  4382     \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
       
  4383     \endgraf
       
  4384     \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
       
  4385       \removelastskip
       
  4386       % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
       
  4387       % or better ...
       
  4388       \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \else \penalty-50 \fi
       
  4389       \vskip\envskipamount
       
  4390     \fi
       
  4391   \fi
       
  4392 }}
       
  4393 
       
  4394 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
       
  4395 
       
  4396 % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
       
  4397 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
       
  4398 
       
  4399 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
       
  4400 % environment contents.
       
  4401 \font\circle=lcircle10
       
  4402 \newdimen\circthick
       
  4403 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
       
  4404 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
       
  4405 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
       
  4406 %
       
  4407 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
       
  4408 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
       
  4409 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
       
  4410 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
       
  4411 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
       
  4412         \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
       
  4413         \hskip\rskip}}
       
  4414 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
       
  4415         \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
       
  4416         \hskip\rskip}}
       
  4417 %
       
  4418 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
       
  4419 
       
  4420 \def\cartouche{%
       
  4421 \par  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
       
  4422 \begingroup
       
  4423         \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
       
  4424         \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
       
  4425         \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
       
  4426                           \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
       
  4427         \cartouter=\hsize
       
  4428         \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
       
  4429 %                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
       
  4430 %                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
       
  4431         \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
       
  4432         % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
       
  4433         \let\nonarrowing=\comment
       
  4434         \vbox\bgroup
       
  4435                 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
       
  4436                 \carttop
       
  4437                 \hbox\bgroup
       
  4438                         \hskip\lskip
       
  4439                         \vrule\kern3pt
       
  4440                         \vbox\bgroup
       
  4441                                 \hsize=\cartinner
       
  4442                                 \kern3pt
       
  4443                                 \begingroup
       
  4444                                         \baselineskip=\normbskip
       
  4445                                         \lineskip=\normlskip
       
  4446                                         \parskip=\normpskip
       
  4447                                         \vskip -\parskip
       
  4448 \def\Ecartouche{%
       
  4449                                 \endgroup
       
  4450                                 \kern3pt
       
  4451                         \egroup
       
  4452                         \kern3pt\vrule
       
  4453                         \hskip\rskip
       
  4454                 \egroup
       
  4455                 \cartbot
       
  4456         \egroup
       
  4457 \endgroup
       
  4458 }}
       
  4459 
       
  4460 
       
  4461 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
       
  4462 % inside a group.
       
  4463 \def\nonfillstart{%
       
  4464   \aboveenvbreak
       
  4465   \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
       
  4466   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
       
  4467   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
       
  4468   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
       
  4469   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
       
  4470   \parskip = 0pt
       
  4471   \parindent = 0pt
       
  4472   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
       
  4473   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
       
  4474   % at next level down.
       
  4475   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
       
  4476     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
       
  4477     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
       
  4478     \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
       
  4479     \let\nonarrowing=\relax
       
  4480   \fi
       
  4481 }
       
  4482 
       
  4483 % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
       
  4484 % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
       
  4485 %
       
  4486 % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
       
  4487 % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
       
  4488 % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
       
  4489 % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
       
  4490 % the environment.
       
  4491 %
       
  4492 \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
       
  4493 
       
  4494 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
       
  4495 \def\lisp{\begingroup
       
  4496   \nonfillstart
       
  4497   \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
       
  4498   \tt
       
  4499   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
       
  4500   \gobble       % eat return
       
  4501 }
       
  4502 
       
  4503 % @example: Same as @lisp.
       
  4504 \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
       
  4505 
       
  4506 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
       
  4507 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
       
  4508 \def\smalllisp{\begingroup
       
  4509   \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
       
  4510   \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
       
  4511   \smallexamplefonts
       
  4512   \lisp
       
  4513 }
       
  4514 \let\smallexample = \smalllisp
       
  4515 
       
  4516 
       
  4517 % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
       
  4518 %
       
  4519 \def\display{\begingroup
       
  4520   \nonfillstart
       
  4521   \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
       
  4522   \gobble
       
  4523 }
       
  4524 %
       
  4525 % @smalldisplay: @display plus smaller fonts.
       
  4526 %
       
  4527 \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup
       
  4528   \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
       
  4529   \smallexamplefonts \rm
       
  4530   \display
       
  4531 }
       
  4532 
       
  4533 % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
       
  4534 %
       
  4535 \def\format{\begingroup
       
  4536   \let\nonarrowing = t
       
  4537   \nonfillstart
       
  4538   \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
       
  4539   \gobble
       
  4540 }
       
  4541 %
       
  4542 % @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.
       
  4543 %
       
  4544 \def\smallformat{\begingroup
       
  4545   \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
       
  4546   \smallexamplefonts \rm
       
  4547   \format
       
  4548 }
       
  4549 
       
  4550 % @flushleft (same as @format).
       
  4551 %
       
  4552 \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
       
  4553 
       
  4554 % @flushright.
       
  4555 %
       
  4556 \def\flushright{\begingroup
       
  4557   \let\nonarrowing = t
       
  4558   \nonfillstart
       
  4559   \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
       
  4560   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
       
  4561   \gobble
       
  4562 }
       
  4563 
       
  4564 
       
  4565 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
       
  4566 % and narrows the margins.
       
  4567 %
       
  4568 \def\quotation{%
       
  4569   \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
       
  4570   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
       
  4571   \parindent=0pt
       
  4572   % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
       
  4573   % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
       
  4574   \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
       
  4575   %
       
  4576   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
       
  4577   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
       
  4578     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
       
  4579     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
       
  4580     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
       
  4581     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
       
  4582   \fi
       
  4583 }
       
  4584 
       
  4585 
       
  4586 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
       
  4587 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
       
  4588 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
       
  4589 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
       
  4590 %
       
  4591 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
       
  4592 %
       
  4593 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
       
  4594 % active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
       
  4595 % verbatim line.
       
  4596 \def\dospecials{%
       
  4597   \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
       
  4598   \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
       
  4599   \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
       
  4600 }
       
  4601 %
       
  4602 % [Knuth] p. 380
       
  4603 \def\uncatcodespecials{%
       
  4604   \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
       
  4605 %
       
  4606 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
       
  4607 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
       
  4608 \begingroup
       
  4609   \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
       
  4610 \endgroup
       
  4611 %
       
  4612 % Setup for the @verb command.
       
  4613 %
       
  4614 % Eight spaces for a tab
       
  4615 \begingroup
       
  4616   \catcode`\^^I=\active
       
  4617   \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
       
  4618 \endgroup
       
  4619 %
       
  4620 \def\setupverb{%
       
  4621   \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
       
  4622   \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
       
  4623   \catcode`\`=\active
       
  4624   \tabeightspaces
       
  4625   % Respect line breaks,
       
  4626   % print special symbols as themselves, and
       
  4627   % make each space count
       
  4628   % must do in this order:
       
  4629   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
       
  4630 }
       
  4631 
       
  4632 % Setup for the @verbatim environment
       
  4633 %
       
  4634 % Real tab expansion
       
  4635 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
       
  4636 %
       
  4637 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
       
  4638 \begingroup
       
  4639   \catcode`\^^I=\active
       
  4640   \gdef\tabexpand{%
       
  4641     \catcode`\^^I=\active
       
  4642     \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
       
  4643       \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
       
  4644       \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
       
  4645       \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
       
  4646       \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
       
  4647       \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
       
  4648     }%
       
  4649   }
       
  4650 \endgroup
       
  4651 \def\setupverbatim{%
       
  4652   % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
       
  4653   \tt
       
  4654   \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
       
  4655   \catcode`\`=\active
       
  4656   \tabexpand
       
  4657   % Respect line breaks,
       
  4658   % print special symbols as themselves, and
       
  4659   % make each space count
       
  4660   % must do in this order:
       
  4661   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
       
  4662   \everypar{\starttabbox}%
       
  4663 }
       
  4664 
       
  4665 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
       
  4666 % delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
       
  4667 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
       
  4668 %
       
  4669 %    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
       
  4670 %
       
  4671 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
       
  4672 \begingroup
       
  4673   \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
       
  4674   \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
       
  4675 \endgroup
       
  4676 %
       
  4677 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
       
  4678 %
       
  4679 %
       
  4680 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
       
  4681 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
       
  4682 %
       
  4683 %     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
       
  4684 %
       
  4685 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
       
  4686 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
       
  4687 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
       
  4688 %
       
  4689 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
       
  4690 %% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
       
  4691 %% \begingroup
       
  4692 %% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
       
  4693 %% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
       
  4694 %% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
       
  4695 %% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
       
  4696 %% |endgroup
       
  4697 %
       
  4698 \begingroup
       
  4699   \catcode`\ =\active
       
  4700   \obeylines %
       
  4701   % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
       
  4702   % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
       
  4703   % line in the output.
       
  4704   \gdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\end{verbatim}}%
       
  4705 \endgroup
       
  4706 %
       
  4707 \def\verbatim{%
       
  4708   \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
       
  4709   \begingroup
       
  4710     \nonfillstart
       
  4711     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
       
  4712     \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
       
  4713 }
       
  4714 
       
  4715 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
       
  4716 %
       
  4717 % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
       
  4718 \def\verbatiminclude{%
       
  4719   \begingroup
       
  4720     \catcode`\\=\other
       
  4721     \catcode`~=\other
       
  4722     \catcode`^=\other
       
  4723     \catcode`_=\other
       
  4724     \catcode`|=\other
       
  4725     \catcode`<=\other
       
  4726     \catcode`>=\other
       
  4727     \catcode`+=\other
       
  4728     \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
       
  4729 }
       
  4730 \def\setupverbatiminclude{%
       
  4731   \begingroup
       
  4732     \nonfillstart
       
  4733     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
       
  4734     \begingroup\setupverbatim
       
  4735 }
       
  4736 %
       
  4737 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
       
  4738      % Restore active chars for included file.
       
  4739   \endgroup
       
  4740   \begingroup
       
  4741     \let\value=\expandablevalue
       
  4742     \def\thisfile{#1}%
       
  4743     \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
       
  4744   \endgroup
       
  4745   \nonfillfinish
       
  4746   \endgroup
       
  4747 }
       
  4748 
       
  4749 % @copying ... @end copying.
       
  4750 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.  Many commands won't be
       
  4751 % allowed in this context, but that's ok.
       
  4752 %
       
  4753 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
       
  4754 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
       
  4755 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
       
  4756 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
       
  4757 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
       
  4758 % possible is very desirable.
       
  4759 %
       
  4760 \def\copying{\begingroup
       
  4761   % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.
       
  4762   % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the
       
  4763   % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read
       
  4764   % it, but that doesn't matter.
       
  4765   \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}%
       
  4766   %
       
  4767   % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.
       
  4768   \catcode`\^^M = \active
       
  4769   \docopying
       
  4770 }
       
  4771 
       
  4772 % What we do to finish off the copying text.
       
  4773 %
       
  4774 \def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
       
  4775 
       
  4776 % @insertcopying.  Here we must play games with ^^M's.  On the one hand,
       
  4777 % we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
       
  4778 % must be active.  On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
       
  4779 % end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
       
  4780 % definition of ^^M.  On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
       
  4781 % generate a \par.
       
  4782 %
       
  4783 % Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
       
  4784 % then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1.  If it does, then manually
       
  4785 % do \par.
       
  4786 %
       
  4787 % This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
       
  4788 % it.  Similarly for @ignore.  (These commands are used in the gcc
       
  4789 % manual for man page generation.)
       
  4790 %
       
  4791 % Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
       
  4792 % fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
       
  4793 % should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
       
  4794 %
       
  4795 {\catcode`\^^M=\active %
       
  4796 \gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
       
  4797   \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
       
  4798   \def^^M{%
       
  4799     \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
       
  4800       \par %
       
  4801     \else %
       
  4802       \space \penalty 1 %
       
  4803     \fi %
       
  4804   }%
       
  4805   %
       
  4806   % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
       
  4807   \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
       
  4808   \let\comment = \c %
       
  4809   %
       
  4810   % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
       
  4811   % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
       
  4812   \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
       
  4813   %
       
  4814   \copyingtext %
       
  4815 \endgroup}%
       
  4816 }
       
  4817 
       
  4818 \message{defuns,}
       
  4819 % @defun etc.
       
  4820 
       
  4821 % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
       
  4822 \def\setdeffont#1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
       
  4823 
       
  4824 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
       
  4825 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
       
  4826 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
       
  4827 
       
  4828 \newcount\parencount
       
  4829 
       
  4830 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
       
  4831 %
       
  4832 \def\activeparens{%
       
  4833   \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
       
  4834   \catcode`\&=\active
       
  4835   \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
       
  4836 }
       
  4837 
       
  4838 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
       
  4839 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
       
  4840 
       
  4841 {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
       
  4842 
       
  4843 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
       
  4844 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
       
  4845 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
       
  4846 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
       
  4847 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
       
  4848 
       
  4849 \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
       
  4850 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
       
  4851 % This is used to turn on special parens
       
  4852 % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
       
  4853 \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
       
  4854 
       
  4855 % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
       
  4856 % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
       
  4857 \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
       
  4858   \global\advance\parencount by 1
       
  4859 }
       
  4860 %
       
  4861 % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
       
  4862 \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
       
  4863 %
       
  4864 \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
       
  4865   % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
       
  4866   \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
       
  4867   \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
       
  4868 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
       
  4869 \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
       
  4870 %
       
  4871 \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
       
  4872 } % End of definition inside \activeparens
       
  4873 %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
       
  4874 %% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
       
  4875 \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
       
  4876 \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
       
  4877 \let\ampnr = \&
       
  4878 \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
       
  4879 \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
       
  4880 
       
  4881 % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
       
  4882 {
       
  4883   \catcode`& = \active
       
  4884   \global\let& = \ampnr
       
  4885 }
       
  4886 
       
  4887 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
       
  4888 % #1 is the function name.
       
  4889 % #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".
       
  4890 %
       
  4891 \def\defname#1#2{%
       
  4892   % How we'll output the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
       
  4893   % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
       
  4894   % just below it.
       
  4895   \ifempty{#2}%
       
  4896     \def\defnametype{}%
       
  4897   \else
       
  4898     \def\defnametype{[\rm #2]}%
       
  4899   \fi
       
  4900   %
       
  4901   % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
       
  4902   \dimen2=\leftskip
       
  4903   \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
       
  4904   %
       
  4905   % Figure out values for the paragraph shape.
       
  4906   \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}%
       
  4907   \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0  % compute size for first line
       
  4908   \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent  % size for continuations
       
  4909   \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
       
  4910   %
       
  4911   % Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of
       
  4912   % width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.
       
  4913   \noindent
       
  4914   %
       
  4915   {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
       
  4916    % so that \rightline will obey them.
       
  4917    \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
       
  4918    \dimen3 = 0pt  % was -1.25pc
       
  4919    \rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}%
       
  4920   }%
       
  4921   %
       
  4922   % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
       
  4923   \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
       
  4924   \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
       
  4925   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
       
  4926   {\df #1}\enskip        % output function name
       
  4927   % \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.
       
  4928 }
       
  4929 
       
  4930 % Common pieces to start any @def...
       
  4931 % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
       
  4932 % #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
       
  4933 % #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
       
  4934 %
       
  4935 \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
       
  4936   \begingroup\inENV
       
  4937   % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
       
  4938   % which is there to keep the function description together with its
       
  4939   % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
       
  4940   % break after all.  Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
       
  4941   % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
       
  4942   % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
       
  4943   % between a section heading and a defun.
       
  4944   \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty0 \fi
       
  4945   \medbreak
       
  4946   %
       
  4947   % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
       
  4948   % so that it will exit this group.
       
  4949   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
       
  4950   %
       
  4951   \parindent=0in
       
  4952   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
       
  4953   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
       
  4954 }
       
  4955 
       
  4956 % Common part of the \...x definitions.
       
  4957 %
       
  4958 \def\defxbodycommon{%
       
  4959   % As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple
       
  4960   % x headers in a row.  It's not a great place, though.
       
  4961   \ifnum\lastpenalty=10000 \penalty1000 \fi
       
  4962   %
       
  4963   \begingroup\obeylines
       
  4964 }
       
  4965 
       
  4966 % Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
       
  4967 %
       
  4968 \def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
       
  4969   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  4970   \def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}%
       
  4971   \catcode\equalChar=\active
       
  4972   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
       
  4973   \spacesplit#3%
       
  4974 }
       
  4975 
       
  4976 % #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).
       
  4977 % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
       
  4978 %
       
  4979 \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
       
  4980   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  4981   \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
       
  4982   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
       
  4983   % The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as
       
  4984   %   @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma}
       
  4985   % See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have
       
  4986   % to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.
       
  4987   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty
       
  4988 }
       
  4989 
       
  4990 % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
       
  4991 % #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
       
  4992 % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
       
  4993 % #5 is the method's return type.
       
  4994 %
       
  4995 \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
       
  4996   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  4997   \def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
       
  4998   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
       
  4999   \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
       
  5000 }
       
  5001 
       
  5002 % Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
       
  5003 % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
       
  5004 % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
       
  5005 % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
       
  5006 % input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
       
  5007 % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
       
  5008 %
       
  5009 \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
       
  5010   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  5011   \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {\def#4{##1}%
       
  5012     \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
       
  5013   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
       
  5014   \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
       
  5015 }
       
  5016 
       
  5017 % For @defop.
       
  5018 \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
       
  5019   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  5020   \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
       
  5021     \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
       
  5022   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
       
  5023   \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
       
  5024 }
       
  5025 
       
  5026 % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
       
  5027 % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
       
  5028 % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
       
  5029 %
       
  5030 \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
       
  5031   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  5032   \def#2{\defxbodycommon \spacesplit#3}%
       
  5033   \catcode\equalChar=\active
       
  5034   \begingroup\obeylines
       
  5035   \spacesplit#3%
       
  5036 }
       
  5037 
       
  5038 % @defopvar.
       
  5039 \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
       
  5040   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  5041   \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
       
  5042     \defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
       
  5043   \begingroup\obeylines
       
  5044   \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
       
  5045 }
       
  5046 
       
  5047 \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
       
  5048   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  5049   \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
       
  5050   \begingroup\obeylines
       
  5051   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
       
  5052 }
       
  5053 
       
  5054 % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
       
  5055 % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
       
  5056 % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
       
  5057 % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
       
  5058 %
       
  5059 % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
       
  5060 % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
       
  5061 % won't strip off the braces.
       
  5062 %
       
  5063 \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
       
  5064   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  5065   \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
       
  5066   \begingroup\obeylines
       
  5067   \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
       
  5068 }
       
  5069 
       
  5070 % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
       
  5071 % braces (if any).  That's what this does.
       
  5072 %
       
  5073 \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
       
  5074 
       
  5075 % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
       
  5076 % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
       
  5077 % (which might be empty) the arguments.
       
  5078 %
       
  5079 \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
       
  5080   #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
       
  5081 }%
       
  5082 
       
  5083 % Split up #2 (the rest of the input line) at the first space token.
       
  5084 % call #1 with two arguments:
       
  5085 %  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
       
  5086 %  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
       
  5087 % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
       
  5088 % and the second is passed as empty.
       
  5089 %
       
  5090 {\obeylines %
       
  5091  \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}%
       
  5092  \long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{%
       
  5093    \ifx\relax #3%
       
  5094      #1{#2}{}%
       
  5095    \else %
       
  5096      #1{#2}{#3#4}%
       
  5097    \fi}%
       
  5098 }
       
  5099 
       
  5100 % Define @defun.
       
  5101 
       
  5102 % This is called to end the arguments processing for all the @def... commands.
       
  5103 %
       
  5104 \def\defargscommonending{%
       
  5105   \interlinepenalty = 10000
       
  5106   \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
       
  5107   \endgraf
       
  5108   \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
       
  5109   \penalty 10002  % signal to \parsebodycommon.
       
  5110 }
       
  5111 
       
  5112 % This expands the args and terminates the paragraph they comprise.
       
  5113 %
       
  5114 \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
       
  5115 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
       
  5116 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
       
  5117 % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
       
  5118 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
       
  5119 #1%
       
  5120 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
       
  5121 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
       
  5122   \defargscommonending
       
  5123 }
       
  5124 
       
  5125 \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
       
  5126 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
       
  5127 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
       
  5128 % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
       
  5129 \boldbraxnoamp
       
  5130 \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
       
  5131   \defargscommonending
       
  5132 }
       
  5133 
       
  5134 % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
       
  5135 
       
  5136 % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
       
  5137 
       
  5138 \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
       
  5139 
       
  5140 \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
       
  5141 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
       
  5142 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
       
  5143 }
       
  5144 
       
  5145 % @defun == @deffn Function
       
  5146 
       
  5147 \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
       
  5148 
       
  5149 \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
       
  5150 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
       
  5151 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
       
  5152 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
       
  5153 }
       
  5154 
       
  5155 % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
       
  5156 
       
  5157 \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
       
  5158 
       
  5159 % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
       
  5160 \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
       
  5161 % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
       
  5162 \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
       
  5163 \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
       
  5164 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
       
  5165 \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
       
  5166 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
       
  5167 }
       
  5168 
       
  5169 % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
       
  5170 
       
  5171 \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
       
  5172 
       
  5173 % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
       
  5174 % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
       
  5175 \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
       
  5176 
       
  5177 % #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
       
  5178 \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
       
  5179 % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
       
  5180 \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
       
  5181 \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
       
  5182 \begingroup
       
  5183 \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
       
  5184 %               at least some C++ text from working
       
  5185 \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
       
  5186 \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
       
  5187 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
       
  5188 }
       
  5189 
       
  5190 % @defmac == @deffn Macro
       
  5191 
       
  5192 \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
       
  5193 
       
  5194 \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
       
  5195 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
       
  5196 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
       
  5197 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
       
  5198 }
       
  5199 
       
  5200 % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
       
  5201 
       
  5202 \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
       
  5203 
       
  5204 \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
       
  5205 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
       
  5206 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
       
  5207 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
       
  5208 }
       
  5209 
       
  5210 % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
       
  5211 %
       
  5212 \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
       
  5213 \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
       
  5214 %
       
  5215 \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
       
  5216   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% function index entry
       
  5217   \begingroup
       
  5218     \defname{#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
       
  5219     \defunargs{#3}%
       
  5220   \endgroup
       
  5221 }
       
  5222 
       
  5223 % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
       
  5224 %
       
  5225 \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
       
  5226   \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
       
  5227                        \deftypeopcategory}
       
  5228 %
       
  5229 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
       
  5230 \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
       
  5231   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
       
  5232   \begingroup
       
  5233     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
       
  5234             {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
       
  5235     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
       
  5236   \endgroup
       
  5237 }
       
  5238 
       
  5239 % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
       
  5240 %
       
  5241 \def\deftypemethod{%
       
  5242   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
       
  5243 %
       
  5244 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
       
  5245 \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
       
  5246   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
       
  5247   \begingroup
       
  5248     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
       
  5249     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
       
  5250   \endgroup
       
  5251 }
       
  5252 
       
  5253 % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
       
  5254 %
       
  5255 \def\deftypeivar{%
       
  5256   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
       
  5257 %
       
  5258 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
       
  5259 \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
       
  5260   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
       
  5261   \begingroup
       
  5262     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
       
  5263             {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
       
  5264     \defvarargs{#3}%
       
  5265   \endgroup
       
  5266 }
       
  5267 
       
  5268 % @defmethod == @defop Method
       
  5269 %
       
  5270 \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
       
  5271 %
       
  5272 % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
       
  5273 \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
       
  5274   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
       
  5275   \begingroup
       
  5276     \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
       
  5277     \defunargs{#3}%
       
  5278   \endgroup
       
  5279 }
       
  5280 
       
  5281 % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
       
  5282 
       
  5283 \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
       
  5284 \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
       
  5285 
       
  5286 \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
       
  5287   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% variable index entry
       
  5288   \begingroup
       
  5289     \defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
       
  5290     \defvarargs{#3}%
       
  5291   \endgroup
       
  5292 }
       
  5293 
       
  5294 % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
       
  5295 %
       
  5296 \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
       
  5297 %
       
  5298 \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
       
  5299   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in var index
       
  5300   \begingroup
       
  5301     \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
       
  5302     \defvarargs{#3}%
       
  5303   \endgroup
       
  5304 }
       
  5305 
       
  5306 % @defvar
       
  5307 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
       
  5308 % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
       
  5309 % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
       
  5310 \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
       
  5311   \defargscommonending
       
  5312 }
       
  5313 
       
  5314 % @defvr Counter foo-count
       
  5315 
       
  5316 \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
       
  5317 
       
  5318 \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
       
  5319 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
       
  5320 
       
  5321 % @defvar == @defvr Variable
       
  5322 
       
  5323 \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
       
  5324 
       
  5325 \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
       
  5326 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
       
  5327 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
       
  5328 }
       
  5329 
       
  5330 % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
       
  5331 
       
  5332 \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
       
  5333 
       
  5334 \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
       
  5335 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
       
  5336 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
       
  5337 }
       
  5338 
       
  5339 % @deftypevar int foobar
       
  5340 
       
  5341 \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
       
  5342 
       
  5343 % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
       
  5344 % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
       
  5345 \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
       
  5346 \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
       
  5347 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
       
  5348   \defargscommonending
       
  5349 \endgroup}
       
  5350 \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
       
  5351 
       
  5352 % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
       
  5353 
       
  5354 \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
       
  5355 
       
  5356 \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
       
  5357 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
       
  5358   \defargscommonending
       
  5359 \endgroup}
       
  5360 
       
  5361 % Now define @deftp
       
  5362 % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
       
  5363 
       
  5364 \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
       
  5365 
       
  5366 % @deftp Class window height width ...
       
  5367 
       
  5368 \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
       
  5369 
       
  5370 \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
       
  5371 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
       
  5372 
       
  5373 % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
       
  5374 % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
       
  5375 %
       
  5376 \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
       
  5377 \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
       
  5378 \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
       
  5379 \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
       
  5380 \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
       
  5381 \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
       
  5382 \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
       
  5383 \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
       
  5384 \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
       
  5385 \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
       
  5386 \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
       
  5387 \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
       
  5388 \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
       
  5389 \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
       
  5390 \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
       
  5391 \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
       
  5392 \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
       
  5393 \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
       
  5394 \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
       
  5395 
       
  5396 
       
  5397 \message{macros,}
       
  5398 % @macro.
       
  5399 
       
  5400 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
       
  5401 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
       
  5402 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
       
  5403  \newwrite\macscribble
       
  5404  \def\scanmacro#1{%
       
  5405    \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
       
  5406    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
       
  5407    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
       
  5408    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
       
  5409    \toks0={#1\endinput}%
       
  5410    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
       
  5411    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
       
  5412    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
       
  5413    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
       
  5414    \input \jobname.tmp
       
  5415    \endgroup
       
  5416 }
       
  5417 \else
       
  5418 \def\scanmacro#1{%
       
  5419 \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
       
  5420 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
       
  5421 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
       
  5422 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
       
  5423 \fi
       
  5424 
       
  5425 \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
       
  5426 \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
       
  5427 \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
       
  5428 \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
       
  5429                     % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
       
  5430 
       
  5431 % Utility routines.
       
  5432 % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
       
  5433 \def\cslet#1#2{%
       
  5434 \expandafter\expandafter
       
  5435 \expandafter\let
       
  5436 \expandafter\expandafter
       
  5437 \csname#1\endcsname
       
  5438 \csname#2\endcsname}
       
  5439 
       
  5440 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
       
  5441 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
       
  5442 {\catcode`\@=11
       
  5443 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
       
  5444 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
       
  5445 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
       
  5446 \def\unbrace#1{#1}
       
  5447 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
       
  5448 }
       
  5449 
       
  5450 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
       
  5451 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
       
  5452 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
       
  5453 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
       
  5454 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
       
  5455 }
       
  5456 
       
  5457 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
       
  5458 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
       
  5459 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
       
  5460 
       
  5461 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
       
  5462 % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
       
  5463 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
       
  5464 
       
  5465 \def\macrobodyctxt{%
       
  5466   \catcode`\~=\other
       
  5467   \catcode`\^=\other
       
  5468   \catcode`\_=\other
       
  5469   \catcode`\|=\other
       
  5470   \catcode`\<=\other
       
  5471   \catcode`\>=\other
       
  5472   \catcode`\+=\other
       
  5473   \catcode`\{=\other
       
  5474   \catcode`\}=\other
       
  5475   \catcode`\@=\other
       
  5476   \catcode`\^^M=\other
       
  5477   \usembodybackslash}
       
  5478 
       
  5479 \def\macroargctxt{%
       
  5480   \catcode`\~=\other
       
  5481   \catcode`\^=\other
       
  5482   \catcode`\_=\other
       
  5483   \catcode`\|=\other
       
  5484   \catcode`\<=\other
       
  5485   \catcode`\>=\other
       
  5486   \catcode`\+=\other
       
  5487   \catcode`\@=\other
       
  5488   \catcode`\\=\other}
       
  5489 
       
  5490 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
       
  5491 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
       
  5492 % where N is the macro parameter number.
       
  5493 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
       
  5494 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
       
  5495 
       
  5496 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
       
  5497  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
       
  5498  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
       
  5499 }
       
  5500 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
       
  5501 
       
  5502 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
       
  5503 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
       
  5504 
       
  5505 \def\macroxxx#1{%
       
  5506   \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
       
  5507   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
       
  5508      \paramno=0%
       
  5509   \else
       
  5510      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
       
  5511   \fi
       
  5512   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
       
  5513      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
       
  5514   \else
       
  5515      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
       
  5516      \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
       
  5517      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
       
  5518      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
       
  5519      % Add the macroname to \macrolist
       
  5520      \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
       
  5521      \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
       
  5522        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
       
  5523   \fi
       
  5524   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
       
  5525   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
       
  5526   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
       
  5527   \fi}
       
  5528 
       
  5529 \def\unmacro{\parsearg\dounmacro}
       
  5530 \def\dounmacro#1{%
       
  5531   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
       
  5532     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
       
  5533     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
       
  5534     % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
       
  5535     \begingroup
       
  5536       \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
       
  5537       \let\do\unmacrodo
       
  5538       \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
       
  5539     \endgroup
       
  5540   \else
       
  5541     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
       
  5542   \fi
       
  5543 }
       
  5544 
       
  5545 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
       
  5546 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
       
  5547 %
       
  5548 \def\unmacrodo#1{%
       
  5549   \ifx#1\relax
       
  5550     % remove this
       
  5551   \else
       
  5552     \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
       
  5553   \fi
       
  5554 }
       
  5555 
       
  5556 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
       
  5557 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
       
  5558 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
       
  5559 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
       
  5560 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
       
  5561 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
       
  5562 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
       
  5563 
       
  5564 % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
       
  5565 % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
       
  5566 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
       
  5567 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
       
  5568 
       
  5569 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
       
  5570 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
       
  5571 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
       
  5572 % it to # just before using the token list produced.
       
  5573 %
       
  5574 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
       
  5575 % the macro is used.
       
  5576 
       
  5577 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
       
  5578         \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
       
  5579 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
       
  5580   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
       
  5581   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
       
  5582     \advance\paramno by 1%
       
  5583     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
       
  5584         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
       
  5585     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
       
  5586   \fi\next}
       
  5587 
       
  5588 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
       
  5589 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
       
  5590 
       
  5591 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
       
  5592 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
       
  5593 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
       
  5594 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
       
  5595 
       
  5596 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
       
  5597 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
       
  5598 % Much magic with \expandafter here.
       
  5599 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
       
  5600 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
       
  5601 \def\defmacro{%
       
  5602   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
       
  5603   \ifrecursive
       
  5604     \ifcase\paramno
       
  5605     % 0
       
  5606       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
       
  5607         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
       
  5608     \or % 1
       
  5609       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
       
  5610          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
       
  5611          \noexpand\braceorline
       
  5612          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
       
  5613       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
       
  5614          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
       
  5615     \else % many
       
  5616       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
       
  5617          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
       
  5618          \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
       
  5619       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
       
  5620           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
       
  5621       \expandafter\expandafter
       
  5622       \expandafter\xdef
       
  5623       \expandafter\expandafter
       
  5624         \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
       
  5625           \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
       
  5626     \fi
       
  5627   \else
       
  5628     \ifcase\paramno
       
  5629     % 0
       
  5630       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
       
  5631         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
       
  5632         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
       
  5633     \or % 1
       
  5634       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
       
  5635          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
       
  5636          \noexpand\braceorline
       
  5637          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
       
  5638       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
       
  5639         \egroup
       
  5640         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
       
  5641         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
       
  5642     \else % many
       
  5643       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
       
  5644          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
       
  5645          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
       
  5646       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
       
  5647           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
       
  5648       \expandafter\expandafter
       
  5649       \expandafter\xdef
       
  5650       \expandafter\expandafter
       
  5651       \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
       
  5652       \paramlist{%
       
  5653           \egroup
       
  5654           \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
       
  5655           \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
       
  5656     \fi
       
  5657   \fi}
       
  5658 
       
  5659 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
       
  5660 
       
  5661 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
       
  5662 % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
       
  5663 % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
       
  5664 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
       
  5665 \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
       
  5666 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
       
  5667   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
       
  5668     \expandafter\parsearg
       
  5669   \fi \next}
       
  5670 
       
  5671 % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
       
  5672 % expanded by \write.
       
  5673 \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
       
  5674   \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
       
  5675 
       
  5676 
       
  5677 % @alias.
       
  5678 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
       
  5679 % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
       
  5680 \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
       
  5681 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
       
  5682 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
       
  5683 \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
       
  5684            \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
       
  5685 \expandafter\endgroup\next}
       
  5686 
       
  5687 
       
  5688 \message{cross references,}
       
  5689 % @xref etc.
       
  5690 
       
  5691 \newwrite\auxfile
       
  5692 
       
  5693 \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
       
  5694 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
       
  5695 
       
  5696 % @inforef is relatively simple.
       
  5697 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
       
  5698 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
       
  5699   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
       
  5700 
       
  5701 % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
       
  5702 \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
       
  5703 \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx #1,\finishnodeparse}
       
  5704 \def\nodexxx#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
       
  5705 \let\nwnode=\node
       
  5706 \let\lastnode=\relax
       
  5707 
       
  5708 % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
       
  5709 \def\donoderef{%
       
  5710   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
       
  5711     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
       
  5712       {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
       
  5713     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
       
  5714   \fi
       
  5715 }
       
  5716 \def\unnumbnoderef{%
       
  5717   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
       
  5718     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
       
  5719     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
       
  5720   \fi
       
  5721 }
       
  5722 \def\appendixnoderef{%
       
  5723   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
       
  5724     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
       
  5725       {Yappendixletterandtype}%
       
  5726     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
       
  5727   \fi
       
  5728 }
       
  5729 
       
  5730 
       
  5731 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
       
  5732 %
       
  5733 \newcount\savesfregister
       
  5734 \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
       
  5735 \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
       
  5736 \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
       
  5737 
       
  5738 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
       
  5739 % anchor), namely NAME-title (the corresponding @chapter/etc. name),
       
  5740 % NAME-pg (the page number), and NAME-snt (section number and type).
       
  5741 % Called from \foonoderef.
       
  5742 %
       
  5743 % We have to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section
       
  5744 % title aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in
       
  5745 % the first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
       
  5746 %
       
  5747 % Likewise, use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
       
  5748 % and backslash work in node names.
       
  5749 %
       
  5750 \def\setref#1#2{{%
       
  5751   \atdummies
       
  5752   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
       
  5753   %
       
  5754   \turnoffactive
       
  5755   \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
       
  5756   \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
       
  5757   \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
       
  5758 }}
       
  5759 
       
  5760 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
       
  5761 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
       
  5762 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
       
  5763 % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
       
  5764 %
       
  5765 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
       
  5766 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
       
  5767 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
       
  5768 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
       
  5769   \unsepspaces
       
  5770   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
       
  5771   \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
       
  5772   \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
       
  5773   \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
       
  5774   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
       
  5775     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
       
  5776     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
       
  5777       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
       
  5778       \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
       
  5779     \else
       
  5780       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
       
  5781       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
       
  5782       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
       
  5783         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
       
  5784         \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
       
  5785       \else
       
  5786         \ifhavexrefs
       
  5787           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
       
  5788           \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
       
  5789         \else
       
  5790           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
       
  5791           \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
       
  5792         \fi%
       
  5793       \fi
       
  5794     \fi
       
  5795   \fi
       
  5796   %
       
  5797   % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
       
  5798   % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
       
  5799   % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
       
  5800   % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
       
  5801   % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
       
  5802   % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
       
  5803   \ifpdf
       
  5804     \leavevmode
       
  5805     \getfilename{#4}%
       
  5806     {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
       
  5807      \ifnum\filenamelength>0
       
  5808        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
       
  5809          goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
       
  5810      \else
       
  5811        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
       
  5812          goto name{#1}%
       
  5813      \fi
       
  5814     }%
       
  5815     \linkcolor
       
  5816   \fi
       
  5817   %
       
  5818   \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
       
  5819     \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
       
  5820   \else
       
  5821     % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
       
  5822     % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
       
  5823     % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
       
  5824     % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
       
  5825     % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
       
  5826     {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
       
  5827      % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
       
  5828      % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
       
  5829      \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
       
  5830      \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
       
  5831     }%
       
  5832     % output the `[mynode]' via a macro.
       
  5833     \xrefprintnodename\printednodename
       
  5834     %
       
  5835     % But we always want a comma and a space:
       
  5836     ,\space
       
  5837     %
       
  5838     % output the `page 3'.
       
  5839     \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
       
  5840   \fi
       
  5841   \endlink
       
  5842 \endgroup}
       
  5843 
       
  5844 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
       
  5845 % output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
       
  5846 % since not square brackets don't work in some documents.  Particularly
       
  5847 % one that Bob is working on :).
       
  5848 %
       
  5849 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
       
  5850 
       
  5851 % \dosetq is called from \setref to do the actual \write (\iflinks).
       
  5852 %
       
  5853 \def\dosetq#1#2{%
       
  5854   {\let\folio=0%
       
  5855    \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
       
  5856    \iflinks \next \fi
       
  5857   }%
       
  5858 }
       
  5859 
       
  5860 % \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into
       
  5861 %   CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...}
       
  5862 \def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
       
  5863 
       
  5864 % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.
       
  5865 %
       
  5866 \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
       
  5867 \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
       
  5868 \def\Ynothing{}
       
  5869 \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
       
  5870   \ifnum\secno=0
       
  5871     \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
       
  5872   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
       
  5873     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
       
  5874   \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
       
  5875     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
       
  5876   \else
       
  5877     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
       
  5878   \fi\fi\fi
       
  5879 }
       
  5880 
       
  5881 \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
       
  5882   \ifnum\secno=0
       
  5883      \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
       
  5884   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
       
  5885      \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
       
  5886   \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
       
  5887     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
       
  5888   \else
       
  5889     \putwordSection@tie
       
  5890       @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
       
  5891   \fi\fi\fi
       
  5892 }
       
  5893 
       
  5894 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
       
  5895 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
       
  5896 %
       
  5897 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
       
  5898   \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
       
  5899 \else
       
  5900   \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
       
  5901 \fi
       
  5902 
       
  5903 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
       
  5904 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
       
  5905 %
       
  5906 \def\refx#1#2{%
       
  5907   {%
       
  5908     \indexnofonts
       
  5909     \otherbackslash
       
  5910     \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
       
  5911       \csname X#1\endcsname
       
  5912   }%
       
  5913   \ifx\thisrefX\relax
       
  5914     % If not defined, say something at least.
       
  5915     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
       
  5916     \iflinks
       
  5917       \ifhavexrefs
       
  5918         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
       
  5919       \else
       
  5920         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
       
  5921           \global\warnedxrefstrue
       
  5922           \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
       
  5923         \fi
       
  5924       \fi
       
  5925     \fi
       
  5926   \else
       
  5927     % It's defined, so just use it.
       
  5928     \thisrefX
       
  5929   \fi
       
  5930   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
       
  5931 }
       
  5932 
       
  5933 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
       
  5934 %
       
  5935 \def\xrdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname}
       
  5936 
       
  5937 % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
       
  5938 \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
       
  5939   \catcode`\^^@=\other
       
  5940   \catcode`\^^A=\other
       
  5941   \catcode`\^^B=\other
       
  5942   \catcode`\^^C=\other
       
  5943   \catcode`\^^D=\other
       
  5944   \catcode`\^^E=\other
       
  5945   \catcode`\^^F=\other
       
  5946   \catcode`\^^G=\other
       
  5947   \catcode`\^^H=\other
       
  5948   \catcode`\^^K=\other
       
  5949   \catcode`\^^L=\other
       
  5950   \catcode`\^^N=\other
       
  5951   \catcode`\^^P=\other
       
  5952   \catcode`\^^Q=\other
       
  5953   \catcode`\^^R=\other
       
  5954   \catcode`\^^S=\other
       
  5955   \catcode`\^^T=\other
       
  5956   \catcode`\^^U=\other
       
  5957   \catcode`\^^V=\other
       
  5958   \catcode`\^^W=\other
       
  5959   \catcode`\^^X=\other
       
  5960   \catcode`\^^Z=\other
       
  5961   \catcode`\^^[=\other
       
  5962   \catcode`\^^\=\other
       
  5963   \catcode`\^^]=\other
       
  5964   \catcode`\^^^=\other
       
  5965   \catcode`\^^_=\other
       
  5966   % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
       
  5967   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
       
  5968   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
       
  5969   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
       
  5970   % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
       
  5971   % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
       
  5972   % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
       
  5973   % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
       
  5974   %
       
  5975   % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
       
  5976   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
       
  5977   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
       
  5978   %
       
  5979   \catcode`\^=\other
       
  5980   %
       
  5981   % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
       
  5982   \catcode`\~=\other
       
  5983   \catcode`\[=\other
       
  5984   \catcode`\]=\other
       
  5985   \catcode`\"=\other
       
  5986   \catcode`\_=\other
       
  5987   \catcode`\|=\other
       
  5988   \catcode`\<=\other
       
  5989   \catcode`\>=\other
       
  5990   \catcode`\$=\other
       
  5991   \catcode`\#=\other
       
  5992   \catcode`\&=\other
       
  5993   \catcode`\%=\other
       
  5994   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
       
  5995   %
       
  5996   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
       
  5997   {%
       
  5998     \count 1=128
       
  5999     \def\loop{%
       
  6000       \catcode\count 1=\other
       
  6001       \advance\count 1 by 1
       
  6002       \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
       
  6003     }%
       
  6004   }%
       
  6005   %
       
  6006   % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
       
  6007   % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
       
  6008   % For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
       
  6009   % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
       
  6010   % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
       
  6011   \catcode`\\=\other
       
  6012   %
       
  6013   % @ is our escape character in .aux files.
       
  6014   \catcode`\{=1
       
  6015   \catcode`\}=2
       
  6016   \catcode`\@=0
       
  6017   %
       
  6018   \openin 1 \jobname.aux
       
  6019   \ifeof 1 \else
       
  6020     \closein 1
       
  6021     \input \jobname.aux
       
  6022     \global\havexrefstrue
       
  6023   \fi
       
  6024   % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
       
  6025   \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
       
  6026 \endgroup}
       
  6027 
       
  6028 
       
  6029 % Footnotes.
       
  6030 
       
  6031 \newcount \footnoteno
       
  6032 
       
  6033 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
       
  6034 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
       
  6035 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
       
  6036 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
       
  6037 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
       
  6038 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
       
  6039 
       
  6040 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
       
  6041 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
       
  6042 
       
  6043 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
       
  6044 
       
  6045 {\catcode `\@=11
       
  6046 %
       
  6047 % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
       
  6048 \gdef\footnote{%
       
  6049   \let\indent=\ptexindent
       
  6050   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
       
  6051   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
       
  6052   %
       
  6053   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
       
  6054   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
       
  6055   \let\@sf\empty
       
  6056   \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
       
  6057   %
       
  6058   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
       
  6059   \unskip
       
  6060   \thisfootno\@sf
       
  6061   \dofootnote
       
  6062 }%
       
  6063 
       
  6064 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
       
  6065 % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
       
  6066 %
       
  6067 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
       
  6068 % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
       
  6069 % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
       
  6070 %
       
  6071 % The start of the footnote looks usually like this:
       
  6072 \gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup}
       
  6073 %
       
  6074 % ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.
       
  6075 %
       
  6076 \gdef\dofootnote{%
       
  6077   \startfootins
       
  6078   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
       
  6079   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
       
  6080   % So reset some parameters.
       
  6081   \hsize=\pagewidth
       
  6082   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
       
  6083   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
       
  6084   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
       
  6085   \floatingpenalty\@MM
       
  6086   \leftskip\z@skip
       
  6087   \rightskip\z@skip
       
  6088   \spaceskip\z@skip
       
  6089   \xspaceskip\z@skip
       
  6090   \parindent\defaultparindent
       
  6091   %
       
  6092   \smallfonts \rm
       
  6093   %
       
  6094   % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
       
  6095   % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
       
  6096   % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
       
  6097   % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
       
  6098   \let\noindent = \relax
       
  6099   %
       
  6100   % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
       
  6101   % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
       
  6102   \everypar = {\hang}%
       
  6103   \textindent{\thisfootno}%
       
  6104   %
       
  6105   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
       
  6106   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
       
  6107   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
       
  6108   \footstrut
       
  6109   \futurelet\next\fo@t
       
  6110 }
       
  6111 }%end \catcode `\@=11
       
  6112 
       
  6113 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
       
  6114 % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
       
  6115 % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
       
  6116 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
       
  6117 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
       
  6118 %
       
  6119 \def\|{%
       
  6120   % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
       
  6121   \leavevmode
       
  6122   %
       
  6123   % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
       
  6124   \vadjust{%
       
  6125     % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
       
  6126     % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
       
  6127     \vskip-\baselineskip
       
  6128     %
       
  6129     % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
       
  6130     % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
       
  6131     \llap{%
       
  6132       %
       
  6133       % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
       
  6134       \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
       
  6135       %
       
  6136       % This is the space between the bar and the text.
       
  6137       \hskip 12pt
       
  6138     }%
       
  6139   }%
       
  6140 }
       
  6141 
       
  6142 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
       
  6143 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
       
  6144 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
       
  6145 %
       
  6146 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
       
  6147 
       
  6148 % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
       
  6149 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
       
  6150 %
       
  6151 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
       
  6152 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
       
  6153 % undone and the next image would fail.
       
  6154 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
       
  6155 \ifeof 1 \else
       
  6156   \closein 1
       
  6157   % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
       
  6158   % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
       
  6159   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
       
  6160   \input epsf.tex
       
  6161 \fi
       
  6162 %
       
  6163 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
       
  6164 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
       
  6165 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
       
  6166   work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
       
  6167   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
       
  6168 %
       
  6169 \def\image#1{%
       
  6170   \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
       
  6171     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
       
  6172       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
       
  6173       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
       
  6174       \global\warnednoepsftrue
       
  6175     \fi
       
  6176   \else
       
  6177     \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
       
  6178   \fi
       
  6179 }
       
  6180 %
       
  6181 % Arguments to @image:
       
  6182 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
       
  6183 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
       
  6184 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
       
  6185 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
       
  6186 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
       
  6187 \newif\ifimagevmode
       
  6188 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
       
  6189   \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
       
  6190   \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
       
  6191   % If the image is by itself, center it.
       
  6192   \ifvmode
       
  6193     \imagevmodetrue
       
  6194     \nobreak\bigskip
       
  6195     % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
       
  6196     % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
       
  6197     % above and below.
       
  6198     \nobreak\vskip\parskip
       
  6199     \nobreak
       
  6200     \line\bgroup\hss
       
  6201   \fi
       
  6202   %
       
  6203   % Output the image.
       
  6204   \ifpdf
       
  6205     \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
       
  6206   \else
       
  6207     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
       
  6208     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
       
  6209     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
       
  6210     \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
       
  6211   \fi
       
  6212   %
       
  6213   \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
       
  6214 \endgroup}
       
  6215 
       
  6216 
       
  6217 \message{localization,}
       
  6218 % and i18n.
       
  6219 
       
  6220 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
       
  6221 % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
       
  6222 % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
       
  6223 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
       
  6224 %
       
  6225 \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
       
  6226 \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
       
  6227   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
       
  6228   % Read the file if it exists.
       
  6229   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
       
  6230   \ifeof1
       
  6231     \errhelp = \nolanghelp
       
  6232     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
       
  6233     \let\temp = \relax
       
  6234   \else
       
  6235     \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
       
  6236   \fi
       
  6237   \temp
       
  6238   \endgroup
       
  6239 }
       
  6240 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
       
  6241 is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
       
  6242 should work if nowhere else does.}
       
  6243 
       
  6244 
       
  6245 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
       
  6246 % likely, but for now just recognize it.
       
  6247 \let\documentencoding = \comment
       
  6248 
       
  6249 
       
  6250 % Page size parameters.
       
  6251 %
       
  6252 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
       
  6253 
       
  6254 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
       
  6255 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
       
  6256 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
       
  6257 
       
  6258 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
       
  6259 \vbadness = 10000
       
  6260 
       
  6261 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
       
  6262 \hbadness = 2000
       
  6263 
       
  6264 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
       
  6265 \widowpenalty=10000
       
  6266 \clubpenalty=10000
       
  6267 
       
  6268 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
       
  6269 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
       
  6270 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
       
  6271 % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
       
  6272 %
       
  6273 \def\setemergencystretch{%
       
  6274   \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
       
  6275     % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
       
  6276     \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
       
  6277   \else
       
  6278     \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
       
  6279   \fi
       
  6280 }
       
  6281 
       
  6282 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
       
  6283 % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
       
  6284 % physical page width.
       
  6285 %
       
  6286 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
       
  6287 % \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
       
  6288 %
       
  6289 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
       
  6290   \voffset = #3\relax
       
  6291   \topskip = #6\relax
       
  6292   \splittopskip = \topskip
       
  6293   %
       
  6294   \vsize = #1\relax
       
  6295   \advance\vsize by \topskip
       
  6296   \outervsize = \vsize
       
  6297   \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
       
  6298   \pageheight = \vsize
       
  6299   %
       
  6300   \hsize = #2\relax
       
  6301   \outerhsize = \hsize
       
  6302   \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
       
  6303   \pagewidth = \hsize
       
  6304   %
       
  6305   \normaloffset = #4\relax
       
  6306   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
       
  6307   %
       
  6308   \ifpdf
       
  6309     \pdfpageheight #7\relax
       
  6310     \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
       
  6311   \fi
       
  6312   %
       
  6313   \setleading{\textleading}
       
  6314   %
       
  6315   \parindent = \defaultparindent
       
  6316   \setemergencystretch
       
  6317 }
       
  6318 
       
  6319 % @letterpaper (the default).
       
  6320 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
       
  6321   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
       
  6322   \textleading = 13.2pt
       
  6323   %
       
  6324   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
       
  6325   \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
       
  6326                     {\voffset}{.25in}%
       
  6327                     {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
       
  6328                     {11in}{8.5in}%
       
  6329 }}
       
  6330 
       
  6331 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
       
  6332 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
       
  6333   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
       
  6334   \textleading = 12pt
       
  6335   %
       
  6336   \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
       
  6337                     {\voffset}{.25in}%
       
  6338                     {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
       
  6339                     {9.25in}{7in}%
       
  6340   %
       
  6341   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
       
  6342   \tolerance = 700
       
  6343   \hfuzz = 1pt
       
  6344   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
       
  6345   \defbodyindent = .5cm
       
  6346 }}
       
  6347 
       
  6348 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
       
  6349 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
       
  6350   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
       
  6351   \textleading = 13.2pt
       
  6352   %
       
  6353   % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
       
  6354   % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
       
  6355   % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
       
  6356   % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
       
  6357   % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
       
  6358   % your texinfo source file like this:
       
  6359   % @tex
       
  6360   % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
       
  6361   % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
       
  6362   % @end tex
       
  6363   \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
       
  6364                     {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
       
  6365                     {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
       
  6366                     {297mm}{210mm}%
       
  6367   %
       
  6368   \tolerance = 700
       
  6369   \hfuzz = 1pt
       
  6370   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
       
  6371   \defbodyindent = 5mm
       
  6372 }}
       
  6373 
       
  6374 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
       
  6375 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
       
  6376 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
       
  6377 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
       
  6378   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
       
  6379   \textleading = 12.5pt
       
  6380   %
       
  6381   \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
       
  6382                     {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
       
  6383                     {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
       
  6384                     {210mm}{148mm}%
       
  6385   %
       
  6386   \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
       
  6387   \tolerance = 800
       
  6388   \hfuzz = 1.2pt
       
  6389   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
       
  6390   \defbodyindent = 2mm
       
  6391   \tableindent = 12mm
       
  6392 }}
       
  6393 
       
  6394 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
       
  6395 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
       
  6396   \afourpaper
       
  6397   \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
       
  6398                     {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
       
  6399                     {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
       
  6400                     {297mm}{210mm}%
       
  6401   %
       
  6402   % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
       
  6403   \globaldefs = 0
       
  6404 }}
       
  6405 
       
  6406 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
       
  6407 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
       
  6408   \afourpaper
       
  6409   \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
       
  6410                     {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
       
  6411                     {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
       
  6412                     {297mm}{210mm}%
       
  6413   \globaldefs = 0
       
  6414 }}
       
  6415 
       
  6416 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
       
  6417 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
       
  6418 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
       
  6419 %
       
  6420 \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
       
  6421 \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
       
  6422 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
       
  6423   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
       
  6424   \globaldefs = 1
       
  6425   %
       
  6426   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
       
  6427   \setleading{\textleading}%
       
  6428   %
       
  6429   \dimen0 = #1
       
  6430   \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
       
  6431   %
       
  6432   \dimen2 = \hsize
       
  6433   \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
       
  6434   %
       
  6435   \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
       
  6436                     {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
       
  6437                     {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
       
  6438                     {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
       
  6439 }}
       
  6440 
       
  6441 % Set default to letter.
       
  6442 %
       
  6443 \letterpaper
       
  6444 
       
  6445 
       
  6446 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
       
  6447 
       
  6448 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
       
  6449 \catcode`\"=\other
       
  6450 \catcode`\~=\other
       
  6451 \catcode`\^=\other
       
  6452 \catcode`\_=\other
       
  6453 \catcode`\|=\other
       
  6454 \catcode`\<=\other
       
  6455 \catcode`\>=\other
       
  6456 \catcode`\+=\other
       
  6457 \catcode`\$=\other
       
  6458 \def\normaldoublequote{"}
       
  6459 \def\normaltilde{~}
       
  6460 \def\normalcaret{^}
       
  6461 \def\normalunderscore{_}
       
  6462 \def\normalverticalbar{|}
       
  6463 \def\normalless{<}
       
  6464 \def\normalgreater{>}
       
  6465 \def\normalplus{+}
       
  6466 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
       
  6467 
       
  6468 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
       
  6469 % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
       
  6470 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
       
  6471 %
       
  6472 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
       
  6473 % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
       
  6474 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
       
  6475 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
       
  6476 %
       
  6477 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
       
  6478 
       
  6479 % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
       
  6480 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
       
  6481 % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
       
  6482 % this is not a problem.
       
  6483 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
       
  6484 
       
  6485 % Turn off all special characters except @
       
  6486 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
       
  6487 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
       
  6488 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
       
  6489 
       
  6490 \catcode`\"=\active
       
  6491 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
       
  6492 \let"=\activedoublequote
       
  6493 \catcode`\~=\active
       
  6494 \def~{{\tt\char126}}
       
  6495 \chardef\hat=`\^
       
  6496 \catcode`\^=\active
       
  6497 \def^{{\tt \hat}}
       
  6498 
       
  6499 \catcode`\_=\active
       
  6500 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
       
  6501 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
       
  6502 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
       
  6503 
       
  6504 \catcode`\|=\active
       
  6505 \def|{{\tt\char124}}
       
  6506 \chardef \less=`\<
       
  6507 \catcode`\<=\active
       
  6508 \def<{{\tt \less}}
       
  6509 \chardef \gtr=`\>
       
  6510 \catcode`\>=\active
       
  6511 \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
       
  6512 \catcode`\+=\active
       
  6513 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
       
  6514 \catcode`\$=\active
       
  6515 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
       
  6516 
       
  6517 % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
       
  6518 {\catcode`\==\active
       
  6519 \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
       
  6520 
       
  6521 \catcode`+=\active
       
  6522 \catcode`\_=\active
       
  6523 
       
  6524 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
       
  6525 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
       
  6526 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
       
  6527 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
       
  6528 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
       
  6529 
       
  6530 \catcode`\@=0
       
  6531 
       
  6532 % \rawbackslashxx outputs one backslash character in current font,
       
  6533 % as in \char`\\.
       
  6534 \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
       
  6535 
       
  6536 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.
       
  6537 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
       
  6538 % catcode other.
       
  6539 {\catcode`\\=\active
       
  6540  @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx}
       
  6541  @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
       
  6542 }
       
  6543 
       
  6544 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
       
  6545 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
       
  6546 
       
  6547 % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
       
  6548 \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
       
  6549 
       
  6550 \catcode`\\=\active
       
  6551 
       
  6552 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
       
  6553 % even after parsing them.
       
  6554 @def@turnoffactive{%
       
  6555   @let"=@normaldoublequote
       
  6556   @let\=@realbackslash
       
  6557   @let~=@normaltilde
       
  6558   @let^=@normalcaret
       
  6559   @let_=@normalunderscore
       
  6560   @let|=@normalverticalbar
       
  6561   @let<=@normalless
       
  6562   @let>=@normalgreater
       
  6563   @let+=@normalplus
       
  6564   @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
       
  6565 }
       
  6566 
       
  6567 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
       
  6568 % the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
       
  6569 % effect.)
       
  6570 %
       
  6571 @def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
       
  6572 
       
  6573 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
       
  6574 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
       
  6575 @otherifyactive
       
  6576 
       
  6577 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
       
  6578 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
       
  6579 % a backslash.
       
  6580 %
       
  6581 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
       
  6582 @global@let\ = @eatinput
       
  6583 
       
  6584 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
       
  6585 % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
       
  6586 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
       
  6587 % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
       
  6588 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
       
  6589 %
       
  6590 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
       
  6591   @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
       
  6592   @catcode`+=@active
       
  6593   @catcode`@_=@active
       
  6594 }
       
  6595 
       
  6596 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
       
  6597 @escapechar = `@@
       
  6598 
       
  6599 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
       
  6600 @catcode`@& = @other
       
  6601 @catcode`@# = @other
       
  6602 @catcode`@% = @other
       
  6603 
       
  6604 @c Set initial fonts.
       
  6605 @textfonts
       
  6606 @rm
       
  6607 
       
  6608 
       
  6609 @c Local variables:
       
  6610 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
       
  6611 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
       
  6612 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
       
  6613 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
       
  6614 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
       
  6615 @c End: